Delta VFD-E-User-Manual

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com



Preface

Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-E Series. The VFD-E Series is manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available.

This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference.

To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD-E series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.

Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions, please contact your dealer.

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

DANGER!

1. AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.

2. A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels.

3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.

4. The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and

W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.

5. Ground the VFD-E using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram.

6. VFD-E series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1phase motors or other purpose.

7. VFD-E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.



WARNING!

1. DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high-voltage.

2. There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.

3. Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.

CAUTION!

1. Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.

2. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight, high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic particles.

3. Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or electric shock.

4. To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment.

5. When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.

6. The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be

≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the short circuit must be

≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).

DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation. Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus

International. CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation (CiA). Other trademarks belong to their respective owners.



Table of Contents

Preface ............................................................................................................. i

Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii

Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2

1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2

1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3

1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3

1.1.5 Remove Instructions ................................................................... 1-7

1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring ............................................... 1-9

1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-9

1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in

Parallel............................................................................................... 1-12

1.3 Dimensions....................................................................................... 1-13

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 2-1

2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2 External Wiring ................................................................................. 2-12

2.3 Main Circuit ...................................................................................... 2-13

2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection............................................................ 2-13

2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals .............................................................. 2-16

2.4 Control Terminals ............................................................................. 2-17



Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up ..................................................................3-1

3.1 Keypad ...............................................................................................3-1

3.2 Operation Method ...............................................................................3-2

3.3 Trial Run .............................................................................................3-3

Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1

4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings.........................................................4-2

4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications..................................................4-33

4.3 Description of Parameter Settings ....................................................4-38

4.4 Different Parameters for VFD*E*C Models .....................................4-182

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting .........................................................................5-1

5.1 Over Current (OC) ..............................................................................5-1

5.2 Ground Fault.......................................................................................5-2

5.3 Over Voltage (OV) ..............................................................................5-2

5.4 Low Voltage (Lv).................................................................................5-3

5.5 Over Heat (OH)...................................................................................5-4

5.6 Overload .............................................................................................5-4

5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal ...............................................................5-5

5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)...............................................................................5-5

5.9 Motor cannot Run ...............................................................................5-6

5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed .....................................................5-7

5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration .......................................................5-8

5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected ..............................................5-8

5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise ......................................................5-9

5.14 Environmental Condition...................................................................5-9

5.15 Affecting Other Machines................................................................5-10



Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................ 6-1

6.1 Fault Code Information....................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1

6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-6

6.2 Maintenance and Inspections............................................................. 6-6

Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1

Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1

B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives..............B-1

B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................B-4

B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit ...................................................... B-7

B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit..........................................................B-8

B.1.4 DIN Rail Installation ....................................................................B-9

B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ..........................................................B-10

B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ..................................................................B-11

B.4 AC Reactor ......................................................................................B-12

B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value................................... B-12

B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value................................ B-13

B.4.3 Applications .............................................................................. B-14

B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ..................................................B-17

B.6 Remote Controller RC-01.................................................................B-18

B.7 PU06................................................................................................B-19

B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 ........................... B-19

B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message............................................... B-19

B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart ...............................................................B-20



B.8 KPE-LE02........................................................................................ B-21

B.8.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02 ............................B-21

B.8.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad...........................................B-23

B.8.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital

Keypad ...............................................................................................B-24

B.8.4 Keypad Dimensions ..................................................................B-24

B.9 Extension Card................................................................................ B-25

B.9.1 Relay Card................................................................................B-25

B.9.2 Digital I/O Card .........................................................................B-26

B.9.3 Analog I/O Card ........................................................................B-26

B.9.4 Communication Card ................................................................B-26

B.9.5 Speed Feedback Card ..............................................................B-27

B.10 Fieldbus Modules .......................................................................... B-27

B.10.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) ...................B-27

B.10.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions ................................B-27

B.10.1.2 Wiring and Settings .........................................................B-28

B.10.1.3 Mounting Method ............................................................B-28

B.10.1.4 Power Supply ..................................................................B-29

B.10.1.5 LEDs Display...................................................................B-29

B.10.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) ...................B-30

B.10.2.1 Introduction .....................................................................B-30

B.10.2.2 Dimensions .....................................................................B-30

B.10.2.3 Specifications ..................................................................B-30

B.10.2.4 Wiring ..............................................................................B-31

B.10.2.5 LED Indications ...............................................................B-31



B.10.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01) ...................... B-31

B.10.3.1 Panel Appearance .......................................................... B-32

B.10.3.2 Dimensions .....................................................................B-33

B.10.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-E........................................ B-33

B.10.3.4 Power Supply.................................................................. B-33

B.10.3.5 PROFIBUS Address .......................................................B-33

B.10.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)........................................................ B-34

B.10.4.1 Product Profile ................................................................ B-34

B.10.4.2 Specifications.................................................................. B-34

B.10.4.3 Components ...................................................................B-35

B.10.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting ................ B-36

B.11 DIN Rail..........................................................................................B-38

B.11.1 MKE-DRA...............................................................................B-38

B.11.2 MKE-DRB...............................................................................B-39

B.11.3 MKE-EP..................................................................................B-39

B.12 EMI Filter........................................................................................B-40

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive.............................. C-1

C.1 Capacity Formulas.............................................................................C-2

C.2 General Precaution............................................................................C-4

C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor .......................................................C-5

Appendix D How to Use PLC Function..................................................... D-1

D.1 PLC Overview....................................................................................D-1

D.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................D-1

D.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft .............................................D-1



D.2 Start-up ............................................................................................. D-2

D.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution .................................................... D-2

D.2.2 Device Reference Table ............................................................ D-3

D.2.3 WPLSoft Installation .................................................................. D-4

D.2.4 Program Input ............................................................................ D-4

D.2.5 Program Download .................................................................... D-5

D.2.6 Program Monitor ........................................................................ D-5

D.2.7 The Limit of PLC ........................................................................ D-5

D.3 Ladder Diagram ................................................................................ D-7

D.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram...................... D-7

D.3.2 Introduction................................................................................ D-7

D.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram ........................................ D-10

D.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program ............................. D-13

D.4 PLC Devices ................................................................................... D-18

D.4.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number ................................... D-18

D.4.2 Devices Functions ................................................................... D-19

D.4.3 Value, Constant [K] / [H] .......................................................... D-20

D.4.4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay ............................................... D-21

D.4.5 The Function of Timer.............................................................. D-21

D.4.6 The Features and Functions of Counter .................................. D-22

D.4.7 Register Types......................................................................... D-23

D.4.8 Special Auxiliary Relays .......................................................... D-24

D.4.9 Special Registers..................................................................... D-25

D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode) .. D-

26



D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode) .....................................D-27

D.5 Commands ......................................................................................D-27

D.5.1 Basic Commands .....................................................................D-27

D.5.2 Output Commands ...................................................................D-28

D.5.3 Timer and Counters..................................................................D-28

D.5.4 Main Control Commands..........................................................D-28

D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact ......D-28

D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands............................D-29

D.5.7 End Command .........................................................................D-29

D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands ................................................D-29

D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands................................D-44

D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands............................D-45

D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive .........D-57

D.6 Error Code .......................................................................................D-64

Appendix E CANopen Function .................................................................E-1

E.1 Overview............................................................................................E-2

E.1.1 CANopen Protocol......................................................................E-2

E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition....................................................................E-3

E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set.......................................................E-3

E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol ............................................E-4

E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object) ..................................E-4

E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object).................................................E-6

E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object)................................................E-7

E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object).................................................E-9



E.2 How to Control by CANopen ........................................................... E-13



Chapter 1 Introduction

The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:

CAUTION!

1. Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.

2. Store within an ambient temperature range of -20

°

C to +60

°

C.

3. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.

4. Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.

5. DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.

6. DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and frost.

7. If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors.

8. When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.

Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

1-1 http://www.automatedpt.com

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Chapter 1 Introduction|

1.1 Receiving and Inspection

http://www.automatedpt.com

This VFD-E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:

Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick

Start and CD.

Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.

Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order.

1.1.1 Nameplate Information

Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive

AC Drive Mod el

In put Spec.

Ou tput Sp ec.

Ou tput Freque ncy Ra nge

Se ria l Nu mber & Bar Co de

So ftware Version

Power Board

Contr ol Board

:

IN PUT :3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 5.1A

OU TPUT :3PH 0- 240V 4.2A 1.6kVA 0.75kW/1HP

FREQUEN CY RANGE : 0.1~400Hz

007E23A0T 8011230

0 1.0 3

0 2.0 3

1.1.2 Model Explanation

VFD 007 E

23 A

Version Type

A: Standard drive

C: CANopen

P: Cold plate drive (frame A only)

T: Frame A, built-in brake chopper

Mains Input Voltage

V

21: 230V Single phase

E Series

Applicable motor capacity

002: 0.25 HP(0.2kW)

004: 0.5 HP(0.4kW)

00 7: 1 HP(0.75k W)

015: 2 HP(1.5kW)

022: 3 HP(2.2kW)

037: 5 HP(3.7kW)

055: 7.5 HP(5.5kW)

185: 25 HP(18.5kW)

220: 30 HP(22kW)

07 5: 1 0 HP(7 .5k W)

110: 15 HP(11kW)

150: 20 HP(15kW)

1-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14




1.1.3 Series Number Explanation

007E23A 0T

8

01 1230

Pro du ction n umber

Pro du ction w eek

Pro du ction year 2008

Pro du ction f act ory

T: Taoyu an, W: Wu jian g

230V 3- ph ase 1HP (0.75kW )

Model

If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems, please contact your distributor.

1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances

0.25-2HP/0.2-1.5kW (Frame A)

Input terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Keypad cover

Control board cover

Output terminals

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)


Input terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Keypad cover

Case body

Control board cover

Output terminals

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)

Input terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Case body

Keypad cover

Control board cover

Output terminals

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

20-30HP/15-22kW (Frame D)

1-4

Input terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Case body

Keypad cover

Control board cover

Output terminals

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)





Internal Structure

READY: power indicator

RUN: status indicator

FAULT: fault indicator

1.

Switch to ON for 50Hz, refer to

P 01.00 to P01.02 for details

2.

3.

Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P02.02

Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI (P 02.00=2)

ACI terminal (ACI/AVI2 switch )

NPN/PNP

Mounting port for extension card

RS485 port (RJ-45)

NOTE

The LED “READY” will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off.

RFI Jumper Location

Frame A: near the output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Frame B: above the nameplate


Frame C: above the warning label

Frame D: near the input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Frame

A (A1)

Power range

0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW)

Models

VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A,

VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A

VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C,

VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C

VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T,

VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T

1-6

A (A2)

B

C

D

0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW)

1-5hp (0.75-3.7kW)

7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW)

20-30hp (15-22kW)

VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P,

VFD007E21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P/43P

VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A,

VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C,

VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C

VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E23A/43A,

VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E23C/43C

VFD150E23A/43A, VFD150E23C/43C, VFD185E43A/43C,

VFD220E43A/43C





RFI Jumper

RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.

Main power isolated from earth:

If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off.

Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage

(according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.

CAUTION!

1. After applying power to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper. Therefore, please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.

2. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides, electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper.

3. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.

4. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high.

5. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded

(over 30 ohms) power system or a corner grounded TN system.

1.1.5 Remove Instructions


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Remove Keypad

1. Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover.

2. Pull the cover up to release.

Remove Front Cover

Remove RST Terminal Cover

For Frame B, Frame C and Frame D: it only needs to turn the cover lightly to open it

Step 1 Step 2

Remove UVW Terminal Cover

For Frame B, Frame C and Frame D: it only needs to turn the cover light to open the cover

For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be wired directly.

Remove Fan

For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be wired directly.

Remove Extension Card

For Frame A, Frame B, Frame C and Frame

D, press and hold in the tabs on each side of the fan and pull the fan up to release.

For Frame A, Frame B, Frame C and Frame

D, press and hold in the tabs on each side of the extension card and pull the extension card up to release. On the other hand, it can install the extension card into the AC motor drive with screws.





1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring

1.2.1 Ambient Conditions

Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:

Air Temperature:

-10 ~ +50°C (14 ~ 122°F) for UL & cUL

-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F) for side-by-side mounting

<90%, no condensation allowed

Operation

Relative Humidity:

Atmosphere pressure:

Installation Site

Altitude:

Vibration:

86 ~ 106 kPa

<1000m

<20Hz: 9.80 m/s

2

(1G) max

20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s

2

(0.6G) max

Storage

Transportation

Pollution

Degree

Relative Humidity:

Atmosphere pressure:

Vibration:

<90%, no condensation allowed

86 ~ 106 kPa

<20Hz: 9.80 m/s

2

(1G) max

20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s

2

(0.6G) max

2: good for a factory type environment.

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Frame A Mounting Clearances

Single drive Side-by-side installation Air flow

120mm 120mm

Air Flow

120mm

120mm


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Frame B, C and D Mounting Clearances

Single drive Side-by-side installation

150mm 150mm http://www.automatedpt.com

Air flow

Air Flow

150mm

For VFD-E-P series: heat sink system example

150mm

Air-extracting apparatus

Control panel

Duct temperature

Air flow speed

40

2m/sec

C

dust collector

User 's heat sink should comply with following conditions:

1. Flatness <0.1mm

2. Roughness <6um

3. Grease 10um~12um

4. Screw torque: 16Kgf-cm

5. Recommended temperature <80

C

AC motor drive fan

CAUTION!

1. Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive.

2. Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!

3. Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions are not allowed.

4. The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation.

5. The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.





6. When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation.

7. Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the heatsink.

8. When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.

Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation

120mm 150mm

120 mm

1 50mm

A

B

120mm

120mm

150mm

Air flow

150mm

A

B

120mm

F rame A

150 mm

F ram e B, C and D

1 20mm

F rame A

1 50 mm

F rame B, C and D


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives

in Parallel

1. This function is not for VFD-E-T series.

2. The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration.

3. Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus.

4. The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel.

5. Only the same power system and capacity can be connected in parallel.

6. It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel (no limit in horsepower but these 5 drives should be the same power system and capacity). power s hould be applied at the same time

(only the same power sy stem and c apac ity can be connected in parallel)

Power 208/220/230/380/440/480 (depend on model s)

1-12

U V W U V W U V W U V W

Br ak e module

IM IM IM IM

F or frame A, ter minal + (- ) is c onnec ted to the terminal + ( -) of the brak e module.

F or frame B, C and D, ter minal + /B1 (- ) is c onnec ted to the terminal + ( -) of the brak e module.





1.3 Dimensions

(Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch])

Frame A

W

W1

D

D1

D2

H1 H

S1 S2

Frame

A (A1)

A (A2)

W

72.0

[2.83]

72.0

[2.83]

W1

60.0

[2.36]

56.0

[2.20]

H

142.0

[5.59]

155.0

[6.10]

H1

120.0

[4.72]

143.0

[5.63]

D

152.0

[5.98]

111.5

[4.39]

D1

50.0

[1.97]

9.5

[0.37]

Unit: mm [inch]

D2

4.5

[0.18]

S1

5.2

[0.20]

S2

5.2

[0.20]

- 5.3 -

[0.21]

NOTE

Frame A (A1): VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,

VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C,

VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,

VFD015E23T/43T

Frame A (A2): VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P,

VFD015E23P/43P


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Frame B

W

W1


D

D1

D2

S1 S2

Frame

B1

W

100.0

[3.94]

W1

89.0

[3.50]

H

174.0

[6.86]

H1

162.0

[6.38]

D

152.0

[5.98]

D1

50.0

[1.97]

D2

4.0

[0.16]

Unit: mm [inch]

S1

5.5

[0.22]

S2

5.5

[0.22]

NOTE

Frame B (B1): VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A,

VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C




Frame C


D

W

W1

D1

D2

S2

Frame

C1

W

130.0

[5.12]

W1

116.0

[4.57]

H

260.0

[10.24]

H1

246.5

[9.70]

D

169.2

[6.66]

D1

78.5

[3.09]

D2

8.0

[0.31]

Unit: mm [inch]

S1

6.5

[0.26]

S2

5.5

[0.22]

NOTE

Frame C (C1): VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E23A/43A, VFD055E23C/43C,

VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E23C/43C


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Frame D

W

W1


D

D1

D2

Frame

D

W

200.0

[7.87]

W1

180.0

[7.09]

H

310.0

[12.20]

H1

290.0

[11.42]

D

190.0

[7.48]

D1

92.0

[3.62]

D2

10.0

[0.39]

S2

S1

10.0

[0.39]

Unit: mm [inch]

S2

9.0

[0.35]

NOTE

Frame D (D1): VFD150E23A/23C, VFD150E43A/43C, VFD185E43A/43C, VFD220E43A/43C




Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring.

Applicable Codes

All VFD-E series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters

Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National

Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).

Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data.

The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD-E Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required.

CAUTION!

1. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate.

2. All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock.

3. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.

4. Check following items after finishing the wiring:

A. Are all connections correct?

B. No loose wires?

C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

DANGER!

1. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive.

2. Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring and commissioning.

3. Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.

2.1 Wiring

Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-485 communication.





Figure 1 for models of VFD-E Series

VFD002E11A/21A, VFD004E11A/21A, VFD007E21A, VFD002E11C/21C, VFD004E11C/21C,

VFD007E21C, VFD002E11P/21P, VFD004E11P/21P, VFD007E21P

BR brake resi stor

(opti onal)

BUE brake unit

( optional)

R(L1)

F us e/NF B(None F use Br eaker)

+

R(L1)

-

U(T1)

Motor

S(L2) S(L2)

V(T2)

W(T3)

IM

3~

Recommended Circui t

when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output

If the fault occ ur s, the contact will be O N to turn off the power and protect the power sys tem.

OF F

SA

ON

MC

MC

E

RB

RC

E

RA

RB

Multi-function c ontact output

Refer to c hapter 2.4 for details .

F ac tor y setting is malfunction indication

+24V

RC

F WD/Stop

MI1

MO1

F act ory set tin g:

NPN Mode

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to F ig ur e 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e an d PNP m od e.

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4

Digital Si gnal Common

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

MCM

AFM

ACM

F ac tor y setting:

Driv e is in oper ation

48V50mA Max.

Multi-function

Photocoulper Output

Analog Multi- func tion Output

Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog fr eq.

/ c ur rent meter

0~1 0VDC/2 mA

Analog S ignal common

E

F ac tor y setting: output frequency


ACI Mode

AVI

Sw2

ACI

ACI/AVI sw itch

Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2

5K

3

1

2

Analog S ignal Common

+10V

Power supply

+10V 20m A

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

8 1

RS-485 serial inter face

(NO T for VF D*E*C models)

1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed

F or VFD*E*C mo dels, p lease ref er t o figu re 8.

Main c irc ui t (power) terminals

Contr ol c ircuit ter minals Shielded l eads & Cable


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





VFD002E23A, VFD004E23A/43A, VFD007E23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E23C,

VFD004E23C/43C, VFD007E23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E23P, VFD004E23P/43P,

VFD007E23P/43P, VFD015E23P/43P

BR brake resi stor

(opti onal)

BUE brake unit

( optional)

F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker)

-

R(L1)

S(L2)

+

R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

E

U(T1)

V(T2)

W(T3)

Motor

T(L3)

Recommended Circui t



OF F

SA

ON

MC

MC

RB

RC

E

RA

RB

IM

3~

+24V

RC


Refer to c hapter 2.4 for details .

Fac tor y setting is malfunction indication

FWD/Stop


NPN Mo de

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to F igur e 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e an d PNP m od e.

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4


MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

MO1

MCM

AFM

ACM

F ac tor y setting:


48V50mA Max.

Multi-function

Photocoulper Output

Analog Multi- func tion Output

Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog fr eq.

/ c ur rent meter

0~1 0VDC/2 mA


E

Fac tor y setting: output frequency

Fact ory set ting:

ACI Mod e

AVI

Sw2

ACI

ACI/AVI sw itch

Wh en switch ing to AVI, it in dicates AVI2

5K

3

1

2


+10V

Power supply

+10V 20m A

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

8 1



1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed

F or VFD*E*C models, p lease ref er t o figu re 8.








VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C brake resi stor

(opti onal)

BR


R(L1)

S(L2)

Recommended Circuit


If the fault occur s, the contact will be O N to turn off the power and protect the power sys tem.

OF F

F act ory set ting :

NPN Mo de

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to Fig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN mod e and PNP mod e.

SA

MC

ON

MC

F WD/Stop

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4



ACI Mod e

AVI

Sw2

ACI

ACI/AVI sw it ch

When switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2

5K

3

1

2


Main c ircui t (power) terminals

RB

RC

+24V

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

+/B1

R(L1)

S(L2)

E

+10V

Power supply

+10V 20mA

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

B2

-

U(T1)

V(T2)

W(T3)

E

RA

Motor

IM

3~

RB

RC


Refer to c hapter2.4 for detai ls.

F ac tor y s etting is malfunction indication

MO1

F ac tor y s etting:

Driv e is in operation

48V50mA Max.

MCM

Multi-function

Photocoulper O utput

AFM

ACM

Analog Multi- func tion

Output Termi nal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter

0~ 10VDC/ 2mA


E

8 1

F ac tor y s etting: output frequency

RS-485 s erial inter fac e


1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed

F or VFD*E*C m o dels, p lease ref er to f igu re 8.



CALL NOW 800-985-6929





VFD022E23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E23A/43A,

VFD022E23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E23C/43C,

VFD150E23A/23C, VFD150E43A/43C, VFD185E43A/43C, VFD220E43A/43C brake resi stor

(opti onal)

BR


R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

Recommended Circ ui t

when power suppl y is turned O FF by a fault output


OF F

SA

MC

ON

MC


NPN Mo de

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to F ig u re 7 fo r w irin g of NPN mod e an d PNP mod e.

F WD/Stop

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4



ACI Mod e

AVI

Sw2

ACI

ACI/AVI sw itch


5K

3

1

2



+/B1

R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

E

RB

RC

+24V

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

+10V

Power supply

+10V 20m A

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

B2

-

U(T1)

V(T2)

W(T3)

E

RA

RB

RC


Refer to c hapter2.4 for details.

F ac tor y setting is malfunction indication

MO1

F ac tor y setting:


48V50mA Max.

Multi-function

Photocoulper Output

MCM

AFM

ACM

Analog Multi- func ti on

Output Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter

0~ 10VDC/ 2mA


E

8 1

F ac tor y setting: output frequency



1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed

F or VFD*E*C mo dels, p lease ref er t o figu re 8.

Contr ol c ircuit ter minals

Motor

IM

3~

Shielded l eads & Cable






VFD002E11T/21T, VFD004E11A/21T, VFD007E21T

BR brake resi stor

(opti onal)

R(L1)


B1

R(L1)

B2

U(T1)

Motor

S(L2) S(L2)

V(T2)

W(T3)

IM

3~

Recommended Circuit



OF F

SA

ON

MC

MC

E

RB

RC

E

RA

RB




+24V

RC

F WD/Stop

MI1 MO1


NPN Mo de

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to Fig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN mod e and PNP mod e.

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4


MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

MCM

AFM

ACM



48V50mA Max.

Multi-function




0~10V DC/2mA


E



ACI Mod e

AVI

Sw2

ACI


When switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2

5K

3

1

2


+10V

Power supply

+10V 20mA

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

8 1

RS-485

Seri al interface

1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed



NOTE

F or VF D-E- T s eries, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals ( B1 and B2) dir ectly. B ut it c an't connec t DC- BUS i n parallel.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





VFD002E23T, VFD004E23T/43T, VFD007E23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T

BR brake resi stor

(opti onal)


B1

B2

R(L1) R(L1)

U(T1)

S(L2) S(L2)

V(T2)

T(L3) T(L3)

E

W(T3)

E

Recommended Circuit



OF F

SA

ON

MC

MC

RB

RC

+24V

RA

RB

RC

F WD/Stop

MI1 MO1


NPN Mo de

NPN

Sw1

F ac tor y setting

PNP

Please refer to F ig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN mod e and PNP mod e.

REV/Stop

Multi-s tep 1

Multi-s tep 2

Multi-s tep 3

Multi-s tep 4


MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

MCM

AFM

E

ACM

E

Motor

IM

3~






48V50mA Max.

Multi-function




0~ 10VDC/ 2mA




ACI Mod e

AVI

Sw2

ACI



5K

3

1

2


+10V

Power supply

+10V 20mA

AVI

Master Fr equency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

8 1

RS-485

Seri al interface

1: Reserv ed

2: EV

3: G ND

4: SG -

5: SG +

6: Reserv ed

7: Reserv ed

8: Reserv ed



NOTE

F or VF D-E- T s eries, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals ( B1 and B2) dir ectly. B ut it c an't connec t DC- BUS i n parallel.





Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode

A. NPN mode without external power

NPN

PNP

Factory setting

B. NPN mode with external power

NPN

-

24

Vdc

+

PNP

Factory setting

C. PNP mode without external power

NPN

Sw1

PNP

Factory setting


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



D. PNP mode with external power

NPN

Sw1

PNP


Factory setting

+

24

Vdc

-

1

2

3

CAN_H

CAN_L

CAN_GND

Figure 8 RJ-45 pin definition for VFD*E*C models

PIN Signal Description

CAN_H bus line (dominant high)

CAN_L bus line (dominant low)

Ground / 0V /V-

7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-

CAUTION!

1. The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.

2. Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the terminal.

3. Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube.

4. Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage.

5. The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment.

6. When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals

U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads.





7. With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.

8. The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately.

9. Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.

10. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-E series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details.

11. Multiple VFD-E units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground

loops.

Excellent

Good

Not allowed


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




2.2 External Wiring

R/L1

U/T1

Power Supply

EMI Filter

S/L2

V/T2

Motor

T/L3

W/T3

+/B1

B2

-

FUSE/NFB

Magnetic contactor

Input AC

Line Reactor

Zero-phase

Reactor

Zero-phase

Reactor

Output AC

Line Reactor

Items Explanations

Power supply

Please follow the specific power supply requirements shown in

Appendix A.

Fuse/NFB

(Optional)

There may be an inrush current during power up. Please check the chart of Appendix B and select the correct fuse with rated current. Use of an NFB is optional.

Magnetic contactor

(Optional)

Input AC

Line Reactor

(Optional)

Zero-phase

Reactor

(Ferrite Core

Common

Choke)

(Optional)

Please do not use a Magnetic contactor as the I/O switch of the AC motor drive, as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive.

Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more or advanced capacity is activated .The wiring distance should be

≤

10m. Refer to appendix B for details.

Zero phase reactors are used to reduce radio noise especially when audio equipment is installed near the inverter. Effective for noise reduction on both the input and output sides.

Attenuation quality is good for a wide range from AM band to 10MHz.

Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor. (RF220X00A)

EMI filter

To reduce electromagnetic interference.

Brake resistor and

Brake unit

(Optional)

Used to reduce the deceleration time of the motor. Please refer to the chart in Appendix B for specific Brake resistors.

Output AC

Line Reactor

(Optional)

Motor surge voltage amplitude depends on motor cable length. For applications with long motor cable

(>20m), it is necessary to install a reactor at the inverter output side





2.3 Main Circuit

2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection

Figure 1

For frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,

VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C,

VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P,

VFD007E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P/43P

Brake Resistor(Optional)

BR

BUE

Brake Unit

(Optional)

R

S

No fuse breaker

(NFB)

MC

R(L1)

S(L2)

+

-

U(T1)

V(T2)

T T(L3)

W(T3)

E

E

Motor

IM

3~

Figure 2

For frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A,

VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C

For frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E23A/43A, VFD055E23C/43C,


For frame D: VFD150E23A/23C, VFD150E43A/43C, VFD185E43A/43C, VFD220E43A/43C

Brake Resistor( Optional)

BR

R

S

T

No fuse br eaker

( NF B)

MC +/B1

R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

E

B2

-

U (T 1)

V(T2 )

W(T3)

E

Motor

IM

3 ~

Figure 3

For Frame A: VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,

VFD015E23T/43T

BR

Brake Resistor

(Optional)

No fuse breaker

(NFB)

MC B1

Motor

R

S

T

R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

E

B2

U(T1)

V(T2)

W(T3)

E

IM

3~


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

Explanation of Terminal Function

AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase)

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

+/B1~ B2

AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor

Connections for Brake resistor (optional)

+/B1, -

Connections for External Brake unit (BUE series)

Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.

CAUTION!

Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection.

It is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.

It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.

Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.

Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.

When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above, and not less than 0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping. For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above.

Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.

Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.

Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)

The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running. The methods to control the operation direction are: method 1, set by the communication parameters. Please refer




Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| to the group 9 for details. Method2, control by the optional keypad KPE-LE02. Refer to

Appendix B for details.

When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the

AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by

Delta.

DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives.

Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.

Terminals [+/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor

BR

Brake resistor (optional)

Brake unit (optional)

Refer to Appendix B for details.

BR BR

BUE

+/B1 B2 B1 B2 +/B1

-

Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps,

short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque.

If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (frame B, frame C and VFDxxxExxT models), connect the external brake resistor to the terminals [+/B1, B2] or [B1, B2].

Models of frame A don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external optional brake unit (BUE-series) and brake resistor. Refer to BUE series user manual for details.

Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals [+/B1, -

]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable.

When not used, please leave the terminals [+/B1, -] open.

WARNING!

Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


2-16



2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals

Frame A Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,

Models Wire

VFD002E11A/21A/23A

VFD004E11A/21A/23A/

43A

VFD007E21A/23A/43A

VFD015E23A/43A

VFD002E11C/21C/23C

VFD004E11C/21C/23C/

43C

VFD007E21C/23C/43C

VFD015E23C/43C

VFD002E11T/21T/23T

VFD004E11T/21T/23T/

43T

VFD007E21T/23T/43T

VFD015E23T/43T

VFD002E11P/21P/23P

VFD004E11P/21P/23P/

43P

VFD007E21P/23P/43P

VFD015E23P/43P

12-14 AWG.

(3.3-

2.1mm

2

)

, +, -

Torque Wire type

14kgf-cm

(12in-lbf)

Stranded copper

Only,

75℃

Frame B Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,

Models Wire

VFD007E11A,

VFD015E21A,

VFD022E21A/23A/43A,

VFD037E23A/43A,

VFD007E11C,

VFD015E21C,

VFD022E21C/23C/43C,

VFD037E23C/43C,

8-18 AWG.

(8.4-0.8mm

2

)

, +/B1, B2, -

Torque

18kgf-cm

(15.6in-lbf)

Wire type

Stranded copper

Only,

75℃




Frame C Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,

Models Wire

, +/B1, B2, -

Torque Wire type

VFD055E23A/43A,

VFD075E23A/43A,

VFD110E23A/43A,

VFD055E23C/43C,

6-16 AWG.

(13.3-1.3mm

2

)

30kgf-cm

(26in-lbf)

VFD075E23C/43C,

Stranded copper

Only, 75℃

VFD110E23C/43C

NOTE

To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm

Terminals

2

) wires, use Recognized Ring

Frame D


Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,

Models Wire

VFD150E23A/23C,

VFD150E43A/43C,

VFD185E43A/43C,

, B1, B2, +, -

Torque

4-14 AWG.

(21.2-

2.1mm

2

)

57kgf-cm

(49.5in-lbf)

Wire type

Stranded copper

Only, 75℃

VFD220E43A/43C

2.4 Control Terminals

Circuit diagram for digital inputs (NPN current 16mA.)

PNP Mode

NPN Mode

+24 multi-input terminal

Multi-Input

Terminal

DCM

DCM Internal Circuit

+24V

Internal Circuit


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



The position of the control terminals


RA RB RC

AFM MCM MO1

RS-485

MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V

Terminal symbols and functions

Terminal

Symbol

Terminal Function

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

Factory Settings (NPN mode)

ON: Connect to DCM

Run in MI1 direction

Stop acc. to Stop Method

Run in MI2 direction

Stop acc. to Stop Method

Refer to Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for programming the

Multi-function Inputs.

ON: the activation current is 16mA.

OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA.

+24V DC Voltage Source

RA

RB

RC

+24VDC, 20mA used for PNP mode.

Multi-function Relay output

(N.O.) a

Multi-function Relay output

(N.C.) b

Multi-function Relay common

Common for digital inputs and used for NPN mode.

Resistive Load:

5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC

5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC

Inductive Load:

1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC

1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC

Refer to Pr.03.00 for programming





Terminal

Symbol

Terminal Function

Factory Settings (NPN mode)

ON: Connect to DCM

Maximum 48VDC, 50mA

Refer to Pr.03.01 for programming

MO1-DCM

Max: 48Vdc

50mA

Mo1

MO1

Multi-function Output 1

(Photocoupler) internal circuit

MCM

+10V Potentiometer power supply +10VDC 3mA

Analog voltage Input

+10V

AVI circuit

Impedance: 47kΩ

AVI

AVI

Range: 0 ~ 10VDC =

0 ~ Max. Output Frequency

(Pr.01.00)

ACM

ACM

internal circuit

Analog control signal

(common)

Analog current Input

ACI circuit

ACI

Set-up: Pr.04.11 ~ Pr.04.14, 04.19~04.23

Common for AVI, ACI, AFM

Impedance: 250Ω/100kΩ

ACI

Range: 4 ~ 20mA =

0 ~ Max. Output Frequency

(Pr.01.00)

Analog output meter

ACM circuit

ACM

internal circuit

AFM

Set-up: Pr.04.15 ~ Pr.04.18

0 to 10V, 2mA

Impedance: 100kΩ

Output current 2mA max

AFM

0~10V

potentiometer

Max. 2mA

Range:

Function:

0 ~ 10VDC

Pr.03.03 to Pr.03.04 internal circuit

ACM

NOTE: Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm

2

) with shielded wire.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Analog inputs (AVI, ACI, ACM)

Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.

If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a capacitor (0.1

μ

F and above) and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:

AVI/ACI

C

ACM ferrite core

wind each wires 3 times or more around the core

Digital inputs (MI1~MI6, DCM)

When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce.

Digital outputs (MO1, MCM)

Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.

When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode across the coil and check the polarity.

General

Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.

The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals.

DANGER!

Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage.

The specification for the control terminals





RA RB RC

The position of the control terminals

AFM MCM MO1

Terminals 1

Terminals 2

RS-485 port

MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V

Frame

A, B, C

Control Terminals

Terminals 1

Terminals 2

Torque Wire

5 kgf-cm (4.4 in-lbf) 12-24 AWG (3.3-0.2mm

2

)

2 kgf-cm (1.7 in-lbf) 16-24 AWG (1.3-0.2mm

2

)

NOTE

Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,

VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C,

VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,

VFD015E23T/43T, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P,

VFD015E23P/43P

Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C,

VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C

Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E23A/43A, VFD055E23C/43C,


Frame D: VFD150E23A/43A, VFD150E23C/43C, VFD185E43A/43C, VFD220E43A/43C


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


This page intentionally left blank http://www.automatedpt.com




Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up

3.1 Keypad

Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3. are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded.

Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive

Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.

Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied. Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPE-

LE02.

It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to

“Fault Code Information and Maintenance” for solution. Please do

NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The

DC-link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.

There are three LEDs on the keypad:

LED READY: It will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off.

LED RUN: It will light up when the motor is running.

LED FAULT: It will light up when fault occurs.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|

3.2 Operation Method

The operation method can be set via communication, control terminals and optional keypad KPE-

LE02.

RS485 port (RJ-45)

It needs to use VFD-USB01 or

IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC.





Operation

Method

Operate from the communication

Frequency Source

Operation Command

Source

When setting communication by the PC, it needs to use VFD-USB01 or

IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC.

Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details.

Operate from external signal

+24V

Factory setting:

NPN Mode

NPN

Sw1

Factory setting

PNP

FWD/Stop

REV/Stop

Multi-step 1

Multi-step 2

Multi-step 3

Multi-step 4

Digital Signal Common

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

DCM

E

* Don't apply the mains voltage directly

to above terminals.

Factory setting:

ACI Mode

AVI

Sw2

ACI

ACI/AVI switch

When switching to AVI, it indicates AVI2

5K

3

1

2

Analog Signal Common

+10V

Power supply

+10V 3mA

AVI

Master Frequency

0 to 10V 47K

ACI

4-20mA/0-10V

ACM

E

Figure 3-1

MI3-DCM (Set Pr.04.05=10)

MI4-DCM (Set Pr.04.06=11)

External terminals input:

MI1-DCM

MI2-DCM

Operate from the optional keypad

(KPE-LE02)

3.3 Trial Run

The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal (Pr.02.01=2).

1. Both MI1-DCM and MI2-DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD/STOP and

REV/STOP.

2. Please connect a potentiometer among AVI, 10V and DCM or apply power 0-10Vdc to

AVI-DCM (as shown in figure 3-1)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




3. Setting the potentiometer or AVI-DCM 0-10Vdc power to less than 1V.

4. Setting MI1=On for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running, you should set MI2=On. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please set MI1/MI2=Off.

5. Check following items:

Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct.

Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration.

Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth.

If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad, please operate by the following steps.

1. Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive correctly.

2. After applying the power, verify that LED display shows F 0.0Hz.

3. Set Pr.02.00=0 and Pr.02.01=0. (Refer to

Appendix B operation flow for detail)

4. Press around 5Hz.

key to set frequency to

5. Press key for forward running.

And if you want to change to reverse running, you should press in

page. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please press key.

6. Check following items:

Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct.

Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration.

Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth.

If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run.




Chapter 4 Parameters

The VFD-E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications, the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during operation.

The 14 groups are as follows:

Group 0: User Parameters

Group 1: Basic Parameters

Group 2: Operation Method Parameters

Group 3: Output Function Parameters

Group 4: Input Function Parameters

Group 5: Multi-Step Speed Parameters

Group 6: Protection Parameters

Group 7: Motor Parameters

Group 8: Special Parameters

Group 9: Communication Parameters

Group 10: PID Control Parameters

Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card

Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card

Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Chapter 4 Parameters|

4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings


: The parameter can be set during operation.

Group 0 User Parameters

Parameter Explanation

00.00 Identity Code of the

AC motor drive

Settings

Factory

Setting

Customer

Read-only ##

Current

Display of the AC motor drive

Read-only #.#

00.03

Start-up Display

Selection

0: Parameter can be read/written

1: All parameters are read only

6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

9: All parameters are reset to factory settings

(50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on

Pr.00.12)

10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)

0: Display the frequency command value

(Fxxx)

1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)

2: Display the content of user-defined unit

(Uxxx)

3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04

4: FWD/REV command

5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)

(NOT for VFD*E*C models)


(Uxxx)

1: Display the counter value (c)

2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for

VFD*E*C models)

3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u)

4: Display output voltage (E)

0

0

0




Parameter Explanation Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

5: Display PID analog feedback signal value

(b) (%)

6: Output power factor angle (n)

7: Display output power (P)

8: Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current (t)

9: Display AVI (I) (V)

10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V)

11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (

°C)

12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)

13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)

14: Display PG speed in RPM (G)

15: Display motor number (M)

00.05

User-Defined

Coefficient K

Board

Software Version

Board

Software Version

00.08 Password Input

00.09 Password Set

0. 1 to 160.0

Read-only

Read-only

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

0: V/f Control

1: Vector Control

00.11 Reserved

00.12

50Hz Base Voltage

Selection

0: 230V/400V

1: 220V/380V

1.0

#.##

#.##

0

0

0

0

Group 1 Basic Parameters


01.00

Maximum Output

Frequency (Fmax)

50.00 to 600.0 Hz

Settings

Factory

Setting

Customer

60.00


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





01.01

01.02

01.03

01.04

01.05

01.06

01.07

01.08

Maximum Voltage

Frequency (Fbase)

(Motor 0)

Maximum Output

Voltage (Vmax)

(Motor 0)

Minimum Output

Voltage (Vmin)

(Motor 0)

Output Frequency

Upper Limit

Output Frequency

Lower Limit

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V

460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V

Mid-Point Frequency

(Fmid) (Motor 0)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

Mid-Point Voltage

(Vmid) (Motor 0)

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin)

(Motor 0)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


0.1 to 120.0%

0.0 to100.0 %

01.09 Accel Time 1

01.10 Decel Time 1

01.11 Accel Time 2

01.12 Decel Time 2

Acceleration

Time

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

Deceleration

Time

01.15 Jog Frequency

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.10 Hz to Fmax (Pr.01.00) Hz

0: Linear Accel/Decel

01.16

Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting)

1: Auto Accel, Linear Decel

2: Linear Accel, Auto Decel

3: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load)

4: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel

Time setting)

Factory

Setting

Customer

60.00

220.0

440.0

1.50

10.0

20.0

1.50

10.0

20.0

110.0

0.0

10.0

10.0

10.0

10.0

1.0

1.0

6.00

0





01.16

Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting)

Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

5: Linear Accel. controlled by current, linear

Decel.

0

6: Linear Accel. controlled by current, auto

Decel.

01.17

01.18

Acceleration S-

Curve

Deceleration S-

Curve

0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec

0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec

0.0

0.0

01.19

01.20

01.21

01.22

01.23

01.24

01.25

01.26

01.27

01.28

Accel/Decel Time

Unit

0: Unit: 0.1 sec

1: Unit: 0.01 sec

0.00 to 600.00 sec

Delay Time at 0Hz for Simple Position


0.00 to 600.00 sec


0.00 to 600.00 sec


0.00 to 600.00 sec


0.00 to 600.00 sec


0.00 to 600.00 sec

Maximum Voltage

Frequency (Fbase)

(Motor 1)

Maximum Output

Voltage (Vmax)

(Motor 1)

Mid-Point

Frequency (Fmid)

(Motor 1)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


0.10 to 600.0 Hz

0

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

60.00

220.0

440.0

1.50

01.29

Mid-Point Voltage

(Vmid) (Motor 1)

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


10.0

20.0

01.30

01.31

Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin)

(Motor 1)

Minimum Output

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V

1.50

10.0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



01.32

01.33

01.34

01.35

01.36

01.37

01.38

01.39

01.40

01.41

01.42

01.43

Settings


Maximum Voltage

Frequency (Fbase)

(Motor 2)

Maximum Output

Voltage (Vmax)

(Motor 2)

Mid-Point

Frequency (Fmid)

(Motor 2)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


0.10 to 600.0 Hz

Mid-Point Voltage

(Vmid) (Motor 2)

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin)

(Motor 2)

Minimum Output

Voltage (Vmin)

(Motor 2)

Maximum Voltage

Frequency (Fbase)

(Motor 3)

Maximum Output

Voltage (Vmax)

(Motor 3)

Mid-Point

Frequency (Fmid)

(Motor 3)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


0.10 to 600.0 Hz

Mid-Point Voltage

(Vmid) (Motor 3)

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V


Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin)

(Motor 3)

Minimum Output

Voltage (Vmin)

(Motor 3)

0.10 to 600.0 Hz

115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V

460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V http://www.automatedpt.com

10.0

20.0

1.50

10.0

20.0

10.0

20.0

1.50

10.0

20.0

Factory

Setting

Customer

20.0

60.00

220.0

440.0

1.50

60.00

220.0

440.0

1.50




Group 2 Operation Method Parameters



02.00

Source of First

Master Frequency

Command

Settings

0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multifunction Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved.

1: 0 to +10V from AVI

2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from

AVI2

3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication

4: Digital keypad potentiometer

5: CANopen communication

0: Digital keypad

1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

02.01

Source of First

Operation

Command

2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication.

Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.


Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

5: CANopen communication. Keypad

STOP/RESET disabled.

0: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop

1: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop

2: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop

3: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop

1

0

02.03

PWM Carrier

Frequency

Selections

1 to 15kHz 8

02.04

Motor Direction

Control

0: Enable forward/reverse operation

1: Disable reverse operation

2: Disabled forward operation

0

02.05 Line Start Lockout 1

0: Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.

1: Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





02.06

02.07

02.08

02.09

02.10

02.11

02.12

Settings

Source of Second

Frequency

Command

Combination of the

First and Second

Master Frequency

Command

2: Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.

3: Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.

Loss of ACI Signal

(4-20mA)

0: Decelerate to 0 Hz

1: Coast to stop and display “AErr”

2: Continue operation by last frequency command

0: by UP/DOWN Key

1: Based on accel/decel time

Up/Down Mode

2: Constant speed (Pr.02.08)

3: Pulse input unit (Pr.02.08)

Accel/Decel Rate of

Change of

UP/DOWN

Operation with

Constant Speed

0.01~10.00 Hz




AVI2




0: First Master Frequency Command

1: First Master Frequency Command+

Second Master Frequency Command

2: First Master Frequency Command -

Second Master Frequency Command

0.00 to 600.0Hz Keypad Frequency

Command

Communication

Frequency

Command

0.00 to 600.0Hz

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

0

0.01

0

0

60.00

60.00






Factory

Setting

Customer

0: Save Keypad & Communication

Frequency

02.13

The Selections for

Saving Keypad or

Communication

Frequency

Command

1: Save Keypad Frequency only

2: Save Communication Frequency only

0

0: by Current Freq Command

02.14

Initial Frequency

Selection (for keypad &

RS485/USB)

1: by Zero Freq Command

2: by Frequency Display at Stop

0

02.15

02.16

02.17

02.18

Initial Frequency

Setpoint (for keypad

& RS485/USB)

0.00 ~ 600.0Hz

Display the Master

Freq Command

Source

Display the

Operation

Command Source

Selection of Carrier

Modulation

Read Only

Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00)

Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09)

Bit2=1: by Multi-input function

Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for

VFD*E*C models)

Read Only

Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad

Bit1=1: by RS485 communication

Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode


Bit4=1: by PLC Operation Command (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

Bit5=1: by CANopen communication

0: by carrier modulation of load current and temperature

1: by carrier modulation of load current

60.00

##

##

0

Group 3 Output Function Parameters


03.00

Settings

Multi-function

Output Relay (RA1,

RB1, RC1)

0: No function

1: AC drive operational

2: Master frequency attained

3: Zero speed

4: Over torque detection

Factory

Setting

Customer

8


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





03.01

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO1

5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication

6: Low-voltage indication

7: Operation mode indication

8: Fault indication

9: Desired frequency 1 attained

10: Terminal count value attained

11: Preliminary count value attained

12: Over Voltage Stall supervision

13: Over Current Stall supervision

14: Heat sink overheat warning

15: Over Voltage supervision

16: PID supervision

17: Forward command

18: Reverse command

19: Zero speed output signal

20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE)

21: Brake control (Desired frequency attained)

22: Drive ready


1 Attained

0.00 to 600.0Hz

03.03

Analog Output

Signal Selection

(AFM)

0: Analog frequency meter

1: Analog current meter

03.04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 200%

03.05 Terminal

Value

03.06

Preliminary Count

Value

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

03.07

EF Active When

Terminal Count

Value Attained

0: Terminal count value attained, no EF display

1: Terminal count value attained, EF active

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

0.00

0

100

0

0

0





0: Fan always ON

Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF

2: Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan

OFF when AC motor drive stops

0

03.09

The Digital Output

Used by PLC


3: Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained

Read only

Bit0=1:RLY used by PLC

Bit1=1:MO1 used by PLC

Bit2=1:MO2/RA2 used by PLC





##

03.10

03.11

03.12

03.13

The Analog Output

Used by PLC



Read only

Bit0=1:AFM used by PLC

Bit1=1: AO1 used by PLC


Brake Release

Frequency

Brake Engage

Frequency

0.00 to 20.00Hz

0.00 to 20.00Hz

Display the Status of

Multi-function

Output Terminals

Read only

Bit0: RLY Status

Bit1: MO1 Status

Bit2: MO2/RA2 Status






##

0.00

0.00

##


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





03.14

Desired Frequency

2 Attained

0.00 to 600.0Hz

Settings

Group 4 Input Function Parameters


Factory

Setting

Customer

0.00

4-12

04.00

Keypad

Potentiometer Bias

0.0 to 200.0 %

04.01

Keypad

Potentiometer Bias

Polarity

0: Positive bias

1: Negative bias

04.02

Keypad

Potentiometer Gain

0.1 to 200.0 %

04.03

Keypad

Potentiometer

Negative Bias,

Reverse Motion

Enable/Disable

04.04 2-wire/3-wire

Operation Control

Modes

0: No negative bias command

1: Negative bias: REV motion enabled

0: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP

1: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP

2: 3-wire operation

Input

Terminal (MI3)

1: Multi-Step speed command 1


Input

Terminal (MI4)


5: External reset

Input

Terminal (MI5)

7: Accel/Decel time selection command

8: Jog Operation

Input

Terminal (MI6)

10: Up: Increment master frequency

11: Down: Decrement master frequency

Factory

Setting

Customer

0.0

00

100.0

0

0

3

4

2

1






Factory

Setting

Customer

12: Counter Trigger Signal

13: Counter reset

04.09

Multi-function Input

Contact Selection

14: E.F. External Fault Input

15: PID function disabled

16: Output shutoff stop

17: Parameter lock enable

18: Operation command selection (external terminals)

19: Operation command selection(keypad)

20: Operation command selection

(communication)

21: FWD/REV command

22: Source of second frequency command

23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1) (NOT for

VFD*E*C models)

23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models)

24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program

(PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

25: Simple position function

26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection)

27: Motor selection (bit 0)


Bit0:MI1

Bit1:MI2

Bit2:MI3

Bit3:MI4

Bit4:MI5

Bit5:MI6

Bit6:MI7

Bit7:MI8

Bit8:MI9

Bit9:MI10

Bit10:MI11

Bit11:MI12

0:N.O., 1:N.C.

P.S.:MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3wire control.

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



04.10

Digital Terminal

Input Debouncing

Time

1 to 20 (*2ms)

04.11

Min AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V

04.12

Min AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%

04.13

Max AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V

Settings

04.14

Max AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%

04.15

Min ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA

04.16

Min ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%

04.17

Max ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA

04.18

Max ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%

04.19 ACI/AVI2

0: ACI

Selection

1: AVI2

04.20

Min AVI2 Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V

04.21

Min AVI2 Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%

04.22

04.23

04.24

Max AVI2 Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V

Max AVI2

Frequency

The Digital Input

Used by PLC


0.0 to 100.0%

Read only

Bit0=1:MI1 used by PLC






Bit6=1: MI7 used by PLC





0.0

0.0

10.0

100.0

##

0.0

0.0

10.0

100.0

4.0

0.0

20.0

100.0

0

Factory

Setting

Customer

1




Factory

Setting

Customer





04.25

The Analog Input

Used by PLC


Read only

Bit0=1:AVI used by PLC

Bit1=1:ACI/AVI2 used by PLC

Bit2=1: AI1 used by PLC

##

04.26

Display the Status of Multi-function

Input Terminal


Read only

Bit0: MI1 Status

Bit1: MI2 Status

Bit2: MI3 Status

Bit3: MI4 Status

Bit4: MI5 Status

Bit5: MI6 Status

Bit6: MI7 Status

Bit7: MI8 Status

Bit8: MI9 Status

Bit9: MI10 Status

Bit10: MI11 Status

Bit11: MI12 Status

0~4095

04.27

04.28

Internal/External


Terminals Selection

Internal Terminal

Status

0~4095

Group 5 Multi-Step Speeds Parameters

##

0

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





Factory

Setting

Customer

0.00

05.00 1st Step Speed

Frequency

05.01 2nd Step Speed

Frequency

05.02 3rd Step Speed

Frequency

Step

Frequency

Step

Frequency

Step

Frequency

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00

Frequency

Step

Frequency

Step

Frequency

05.09 10th Step Speed

Frequency


Frequency


Frequency


Frequency


Frequency


Frequency

Group 6 Protection Parameters

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00


06.00

Over-Voltage Stall

Prevention

Settings

115/230V series: 330.0V to 410.0V

460V series: 660.0V to 820.0V

0.0: Disable over-voltage stall prevention

4-16

Factory

Setting

Customer

390.0V

780.0V





06.01

06.02

Over-Current Stall

Prevention during

Accel

Over-Current Stall

Prevention during

Operation

0:Disable

20 to 250%

0:Disable

20 to 250%

06.03

Over-Torque

Detection Mode

(OL2)

Settings


0: Disabled

1: Enabled during constant speed operation.

After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.

2: Enabled during constant speed operation.

After the over-torque is detected, stop running.

3: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.

4: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, stop running.

170

170

0

Factory

Setting

Customer

06.04

06.05

06.06

Over-Torque

Detection Level

Over-Torque

Detection Time

Electronic Thermal

Overload Relay

Selection

10 to 200%

0.1 to 60.0 sec

0: Standard motor (self cooled by fan)

1: Special motor (forced external cooling)

2: Disabled

150

0.1

2

06.07

Electronic Thermal

Characteristic

30 to 600 sec 60

06.08

Present Fault

Record

0: No fault

1: Over current (oc)

2: Over voltage (ov)

3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)

4: Power Board Overheat (oH2)

5: Overload (oL)

6: Overload1 (oL1)

7: Motor over load (oL2)

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





Most

Recent Fault Record

8: External fault (EF)

9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA)

10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd)

11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn)

12: Ground fault (GFF)

Factory

Setting

Customer

16: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA)

06.10 Third Most Recent

Fault Record

17: SW/Password protection (codE)

18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.0)

19: Power Board CPU READ failure (cF2.0)

20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure

(HPF1)

06.11

06.12

Fourth Most Recent

Fault Record

21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)

22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)

Fifth Most Recent

Fault Record

23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)

24: U-phase error (cF3.0)

25: V-phase error (cF3.1)

26: W-phase error (cF3.2)

27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)

28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)

29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)

30: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1)


32: ACI signal error (AErr)






Factory

Setting

Customer

34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)

35: PG feedback signal error (PGEr)

36-39: Reserved

40: Communication time-out error of control board and power board (CP10)

41: dEb error

42: ACL (Abnormal Communication Loop)

Group 7 Motor Parameters


Factory

Setting

Customer

FLA 07.00

07.01

07.02

Motor Rated Current

(Motor 0)

30 %FLA to 120% FLA

Motor No-Load

Current (Motor 0)

Torque

Compensation

(Motor 0)

0%FLA to 99% FLA

0.0 to 10.0

Compensation

(Used without PG)

(Motor 0)

0.00 to 10.00

07.04

Motor Parameters

Auto Tuning

0: Disable

1: Auto tuning R1

2: Auto tuning R1 + no-load test

07.05

07.06

07.07

07.08

07.09

Motor Line-to-line

Resistance R1

(Motor 0)

Motor Rated Slip

(Motor 0)

Slip Compensation

Limit

0~65535 m

0 to 250%

Ω

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

Torque

Compensation Time

Constant

0.01 ~10.00 Sec

Slip Compensation

Time Constant

0.05 ~10.00 sec

0.4*FLA

0.0

0.00

0

0

3.00

200

0.30

0.20


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





07.10

07.11

07.12

07.13

07.14

07.15

Accumulative Motor

Operation Time

(Min.)

0 to 1439 Min.

Accumulative Motor

Operation Time

(Day)

0 to 65535 Day

Settings

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

0

Motor PTC

Overheat Protection

0: Disable

1: Enable

0

Input Debouncing

Time of the PTC

Protection

Motor PTC

Overheat Protection

Level

Motor PTC

Overheat Warning

Level

0~9999(*2ms) 100

0.1~10.0V 2.4

0.1~10.0V 1.2

07.16

07.17

07.18

07.19

07.22

07.23

07.24

07.20

07.21

Motor PTC

Overheat Reset

Delta Level

Treatment of the

Motor PTC

Overheat

0: Warn and RAMP to stop

1: Warn and COAST to stop

2: Warn and keep running

Motor Rated Current

(Motor 1)

30 %FLA to 120% FLA

0

FLA

0.1~5.0V 0.6

Motor No-Load

Current (Motor 1)

Torque

Compensation

(Motor 1)

Slip Compensation

(Used without PG)

(Motor 1)

Motor Line-to-line

Resistance R1

(Motor 1)

Motor Rated Slip

(Motor 1)

Motor Pole Number

(Motor 1)

0%FLA to 99% FLA

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 10.00

0~65535 m

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

2 to 10

Ω

0.4*FLA

0.0

0.00

0

3.00

4





07.25

Motor Rated Current

(Motor 2)

Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

30 %FLA to 120% FLA FLA

07.26 0%FLA to 99% FLA 0.4*FLA

07.27

07.28

07.29

07.30

07.31

Motor No-Load

Current (Motor 2)

Torque

Compensation

(Motor 2)

Slip Compensation

(Used without PG)

(Motor 2)

Motor Line-to-line

Resistance R1

(Motor 2)

Motor Rated Slip

(Motor 2)

Motor Pole Number

(Motor 3)

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 10.00

0~65535 m

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

2 to 10

Ω

0.0

0.00

0

3.00

4

07.32 FLA

07.33

07.34

07.35

07.36

07.37

07.38

Motor Rated Current

(Motor 3)

30 %FLA to 120% FLA

Motor No-Load

Current (Motor 3)

Torque

Compensation

(Motor 3)

Slip Compensation

(Used without PG)

(Motor 3)

Motor Line-to-line

Resistance R1

(Motor 3)

0%FLA to 99% FLA

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 10.00

0~65535 m

Ω

Motor Rated Slip

(Motor 3)

Motor Pole Number

(Motor 3)

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

2 to 10

0.4*FLA

0.0

0.00

0

3.00

4

Group 8 Special Parameters


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





08.00

08.01

08.02

08.03

08.04

08.05

Settings

DC Brake Current

Level

DC Brake Time during Start-Up

DC Brake Time during Stopping

Start-Point for DC

Brake

0 to 100%

0.0 to 60.0 sec

0.0 to 60.0 sec

0.00 to 600.0Hz

Momentary Power

Loss Operation

Selection

0: Operation stops after momentary power loss

1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the

Last Frequency

2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency

Maximum Allowable

Power Loss Time

0.1 to 20.0 sec

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

0.0

0.0

0.00

0

2.0

08.06

Base-block Speed

Search

0: Disable speed search

1: Speed search starts with last frequency

2: Starts with minimum output frequency

1

08.07 0.5

08.08

08.09

08.10

08.11

08.12

08.13

08.14

B.B. Time for Speed

Search

0.1 to 5.0 sec

Current Limit for

Speed Search

Skip Frequency 1

Upper Limit

30 to 200%

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

Skip Frequency 1

Lower Limit

Skip Frequency 2

Upper Limit

Skip Frequency 2

Lower Limit

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

Skip Frequency 3

Upper Limit

Skip Frequency 3

Lower Limit

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

0.00 to 600.0 Hz

150

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00





08.15 Auto Restart After

Fault

Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

0 to 10 (0=disable) 0

08.16

Auto Reset Time at

Restart after Fault

0.1 to 6000 sec

60.0

08.17 Auto Energy Saving

0: Disable

1: Enable

0: AVR function enable

0

08.19

08.20

1: AVR function disable

2: AVR function disable for decel.

3: AVR function disable for stop

115V / 230V series: 370.0to 430.0V

Software Brake

Level

460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V

Compensation

Coefficient for Motor

Instability

0.0~5.0

0

380.0

760.0

0.0

08.21 OOB Sampling Time 0.1 to 120.0 sec 1.0

08.22

08.23

Number of OOB

Sampling Times

OOB Average

Sampling Angle

00 to 32

Read only

20

#.#

08.25 DEB Return Time

0: Disable

1: Enable

0 to 250 sec

0

0

08.26

08.27

Speed Search during Start-up

Speed Search

Frequency during

Start-up

0: Disable

1: Enable

0: By setting frequency

1: By max. operation frequency (Pr.01.00)

0

0

Group 9 Communication Parameters


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



09.00

09.02

09.04

Communication

Address

1 to 254

Transmission Fault

Treatment

0: Baud rate 4800bps




0: Warn and keep operating

1: Warn and ramp to stop

2: Warn and coast to stop

3: No warning and keep operating

Detection

0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds

0.0: Disable

Communication

Protocol

0: 7,N,2 (Modbus, ASCII)

1: 7,E,1 (Modbus, ASCII)

2: 7,O,1 (Modbus, ASCII)

3: 8,N,2 (Modbus, RTU)

4: 8,E,1 (Modbus, RTU)

5: 8,O,1 (Modbus, RTU)







09.05 Reserved

09.06 Reserved

0 ~ 200 (unit: 2ms)

09.07

Response Delay

Time http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

1

3

0.0

0

1




Parameter

09.08

09.09

09.09

Explanation Settings

Transmission Speed for USB Card

0: Baud rate 4800 bps





Communication

Protocol for USB

Card

Communication

Protocol for USB

Card

0: 7,N,2 for ASCII

1: 7,E,1 for ASCII

2: 7,O,1 for ASCII

3: 8,N,2 for RTU

4: 8,E,1 for RTU

5: 8,O,1 for RTU







09.10

09.11

09.12

Transmission Fault

Treatment for USB

Card

Time-out Detection for USB Card

COM port for PLC

Communication


0: Warn and keep operating

1: Warn and ramp to stop

2: Warn and coast to stop

3: No warning and keep operating

0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds

0.0: Disable

0: RS485

1: USB card


Factory

Setting

Customer

2

1

0

0.0

0

Group 10 PID Control Parameters

Parameter

10.00

Explanation

PID Set Point

Selection

Settings

0: Disable PID operation

1: Keypad (based on Pr.02.00)



AVI2

Factory

Setting

Customer

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Parameter

10.01

Explanation

Input Terminal for

PID Feedback

Settings

4: PID set point (Pr.10.11)

0: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)

1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)

2: Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~

+10VDC).

3: Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~

+10VDC).

10.02

Proportional Gain

(P)

10.03 Integral Time (I)

10.04

10.05

10.06

10.07

10.08

10.09

10.10

10.11

10.12

10.13

10.14

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 100.0 sec (0.00=disable)

Derivative Control

(D)

Upper Bound for

Integral Control

0.00 to 1.00 sec

0 to 100%

Primary Delay Filter

Time

0.0 to 2.5 sec

PID Output Freq

Limit

PID Feedback

Signal Detection

Time

0 to 110%

0.0 to 3600 sec (0.0 disable)

Treatment of the

Erroneous PID

Feedback Signals



2: Warn and keep operation

Gain Over the PID

Detection Value

Source of PID Set point

PID Offset Level

Detection Time of

PID Offset

Sleep/Wake Up

Detection Time

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 600.0Hz

1.0 to 50.0%

0.1 to 300.0 sec

0.0 to 6550 sec http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

1.0

1.00

0.00

100

0.0

100

60.0

0

1.0

0.00

10.0

5.0

0.0




Parameter

10.15

10.16

10.17

Explanation Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

0.00

Sleep Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz

Wakeup Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz

Minimum PID

Output Frequency

Selection

0: By PID control

1: By minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)

0.00

0

Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card


11.00

11.01

11.02

11.03

11.04

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO2/RA2

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO3/RA3

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO4/RA4

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO5/RA5

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO6/RA6

Settings

0: No function

1: AC drive operational

2: Master frequency attained

3: Zero speed

4: Over torque detection

5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication

6: Low-voltage indication

7: Operation mode indication

8: Fault indication


10: Terminal count value attained

11: Preliminary count value attained

12: Over Voltage Stall supervision

13: Over Current Stall supervision

14: Heat sink overheat warning

15: Over Voltage supervision

16: PID supervision

17: Forward command

18: Reverse command

19: Zero speed output signal

20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE)

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

0

0

0

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





21: Brake control (Desired frequency attained)

11.05

Multi-function

Output Terminal

MO7/RA7

22: Drive ready


0: No function

11.06

11.07


Terminal (MI7)


Terminal (MI8)





5: External reset

6: Accel/Decel inhibit

11.08


Terminal (MI9)

11.09


Terminal (MI10)


8: Jog Operation

9: External base block



11.10


Terminal (MI11)


13: Counter reset



Input

Terminal (MI12)



19: Operation command selection (keypad)


(communication)

21: FWD/REV command


23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1)


Factory

Setting

Customer

0

0

0

0

0

0

0






Factory

Setting

Customer










12.00

12.01

AI1 Function

Selection

AI1 Analog Signal

Mode

Settings

0: Disabled

1: Source of the 1st frequency

2: Source of the 2nd frequency

3: PID Set Point (PID enable)

4: Positive PID feedback

5: Negative PID feedback

0: ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)

1: AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)

12.02

12.03

12.04

12.05

12.06

12.07

Min. AVI3 Input

Voltage

Min. AVI3 Scale

Percentage

Max. AVI3 Input

Voltage

Max. AVI3 Scale

Percentage

Min. ACI2 Input

Current

Min. ACI2 Scale

Percentage

0.0 to 10.0V

0.0 to 100.0%

0.0 to 10.0V

0.0 to 100.0%

0.0 to 20.0mA

0.0 to 100.0%

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

1

0.0

0.0

10.0

100.0

4.0

0.0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





12.08

12.09

Max. ACI2 Input

Current

Max. ACI2 Scale

Percentage

0.0 to 20.0mA

0.0 to 100.0%

Settings

12.10

12.11

12.12

12.13

12.14

12.15

12.16

12.17

12.18

12.19

12.20

12.21

12.22

AI2 Function

Selection

0: Disabled



3: PID Set Point (PID enable)

4: Positive PID feedback

5: Negative PID feedback

AI2 Analog Signal

Mode

0: ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)

1: AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)

Min. AVI4 Input

Voltage

Min. AVI4 Scale

Percentage

Max. AVI4 Input

Voltage

Max. AVI4 Scale

Percentage

0.0 to 10.0V

0.0 to 100.0%

0.0 to 10.0V

0.0 to 100.0%

Min. ACI3 Input

Current

Min. ACI3 Scale

Percentage

Max. ACI3 Input

Current

Max. ACI3 Scale

Percentage

0.0 to 20.0mA

0.0 to 100.0%

0.0 to 20.0mA

0.0 to 100.0%

AO1 Terminal

Analog Signal Mode

0: AVO1

1: ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)


0: Analog Frequency

AO1 Analog Output

Signal

1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)

AO1 Analog Output

Gain

1 to 200%

Factory

Setting

Customer

20.0

100.0

0

1

0.0

0.0

10.0

100.0

4.0

0.0

20.0

100.0

0

0

100





12.23

AO2 Terminal

Analog Signal Mode

Settings


Factory

Setting

Customer

0: AVO2


0


12.24

AO2 Analog Output

Signal

0: Analog Frequency

1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)

0

12.25

12.26

AO2 Analog Output

Gain

1 to 200%

AUI Analog Input

Selection

0: No function



100

0

12.27

AUI Analog Input

Bias

0.00~200.00% 0.00

12.28 AUI Bias Polarity

0: Positive bias

1: Negative bias

0

100

12.30

AUI Negative Bias,

Reverse Motion

Enable/Disable

0: No AUI Negative Bias Command

1: Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled

2: Negative Bias: REV Motion Disabled

0

12.31

AUI Analog Input

Delay

0~9999 50


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




13.01

13.02

Settings

0: Disabled

1: Single phase

2: Forward/Counterclockwise rotation

PG Pulse Range

Motor Pole Number

(Motor 0)

3: Reverse/Clockwise rotation

1 to 20000

2 to 10

13.03

13.04

13.05

13.06

13.07

Proportional Gain

(P)

Integral Gain (I)

Speed Control

Output Frequency

Limit

Speed Feedback

Display Filter

Detection Time for

Feedback Signal

Fault

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 100.00 sec

0.00 to 100.00Hz

0 to 9999 (*2ms)

0.0: disabled

0.1 to 10.0 sec

13.08

Treatment of the

Feedback Signal

Fault



2: Warn and keep operation

13.09

Speed Feedback

Filter

0 to 9999 (*2ms)

13.10

Source of the Highspeed Counter

0: PG card

1: PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

600

4

1.0

1.00

10.00

500

1

1

16

Read

Only





4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications

Speed Search

Applications Purpose

Windmill, winding machine, fan and all inertia loads

Restart freerunning motor

Functions

Before the free-running motor is completely stopped, it can be restarted without detection of motor speed. The

AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed.

Related

Parameters

08.04~08.08

DC Brake before Running


When e.g. windmills, fans and pumps rotate freely by wind or flow without applying power

Keep the freerunning motor at standstill.

Energy Saving

Functions

If the running direction of the freerunning motor is not steady, please execute DC brake before start-up.

Related

Parameters

08.00

08.01

Applications Purpose Functions

Related

Parameters

08.17 Punching machines fans, pumps and precision machinery

Energy saving and less vibrations

Energy saving when the AC motor drive runs at constant speed, yet full power acceleration and deceleration

For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations.

Multi-step Operation


Conveying machinery

Functions

Cyclic operation by multi-step speeds.

To control 15-step speeds and duration by simple contact signals.

Related

Parameters

04.05~04.10

05.00~05.14

Switching acceleration and deceleration times


Auto turntable for conveying machinery

Switching acceleration and deceleration times by external signal

Functions

When an AC motor drive drives two or more motors, it can reach high-speed but still start and stop smoothly.

Related

Parameters

01.09~01.12

04.05~04.08


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Overheat Warning


Air conditioner Safety measure

When AC motor drive overheats, it uses a thermal sensor to have overheat warning.

Two-wire/three-wire


Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01

04.05~04.08

General application

To run, stop, forward and reverse by external terminals

FWD/STOP

REV/STOP

RUN/STOP

FWD/REV

MI1:("OPEN":STOP)

("CLOSE":FWD)

MI2:("OPEN": STOP)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E

MI1:("OPEN":STOP)

("CLOSE":RUN)

MI2:("OPEN": FWD)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E

3-wire

STOP RUN

REV/FWD

MI3:("OPEN":STOP)

MI2:("OPEN": FWD)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E

Operation Command


Related

Parameters

02.00

02.01

02.09

04.04

General application

Selecting the source of control signal

Selection of AC motor drive control by external terminals, digital keypad or

RS485.

Frequency Hold


General application

Acceleration/ deceleration pause

Hold output frequency during

Acceleration/deceleration

Related

Parameters

02.01

04.05~04.08

Related

Parameters

04.05~04.08




Auto Restart after Fault



Related

Parameters

08.15~08.16

Air conditioners, remote pumps

For continuous and reliable operation without operator intervention

The AC motor drive can be restarted/reset automatically up to 10 times after a fault occurs.

Emergency Stop by DC Brake


High-speed rotors

Emergency stop without brake resistor

Functions

AC motor drive can use DC brake for emergency stop when quick stop is needed without brake resistor. When used often, take motor cooling into consideration.

Related

Parameters

08.00

08.02

08.03

Over-torque Setting


Pumps, fans and extruders

To protect machines and to have continuous/ reliable operation

Functions

The over-torque detection level can be set. Once OC stall, OV stall and overtorque occurs, the output frequency will be adjusted automatically. It is suitable for machines like fans and pumps that require continuous operation.

Related

Parameters

06.00~06.05

Upper/Lower Limit Frequency


Pump and fan

Control the motor speed within upper/lower limit

Functions

When user cannot provide upper/lower limit, gain or bias from external signal, it can be set individually in AC motor drive.

Related

Parameters

01.07

01.08

Skip Frequency Setting


Related

Parameters

08.09~08.14

Pumps and fans

To prevent machine vibrations

The AC motor drive cannot run at constant speed in the skip frequency range. Three skip frequency ranges can be set.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Carrier Frequency Setting


Related

Parameters

02.03

General application Low noise

The carrier frequency can be increased when required to reduce motor noise.

Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost


Related

Parameters

02.06

Air conditioners

For continuous operation

When the frequency command is lost by system malfunction, the AC motor drive can still run. Suitable for intelligent air conditioners.

Output Signal during Running


General application

Provide a signal for running status

Signal available to stop braking (brake release) when the AC motor drive is running. (This signal will disappear when the AC motor drive is freerunning.)

Output Signal in Zero Speed

Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01


Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01

General application


When the output frequency is lower than the min. output frequency, a signal is given for external system or control wiring.

Output Signal at Desired Frequency


Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01

General application


When the output frequency is at the desired frequency (by frequency command), a signal is given for external system or control wiring

(frequency attained).




Output Signal for Base Block



Functions

General application


When executing Base Block, a signal is given for external system or control wiring.

Overheat Warning for Heat Sink


Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01

Related

Parameters

03.00~03.01

General application For safety

When heat sink is overheated, it will send a signal for external system or control wiring.

Multi-function Analog Output


Related

Parameters

03.06

General application

Display running status

The value of frequency, output current/voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage/current meter.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


4.3 Description of Parameter Settings


Group 0: User Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

00.00

Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Settings Read Only

00.01

Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive

Settings Read Only

Factory setting: ##

Factory setting: #.#

Pr. 00.00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code.

Pr.00.01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct.

115V Series 230V Series

Pr.00.00

0.5

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Rated Output

1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0

17 25 33 45 65

Current (A)

Max. Carrier

Frequency

15kHz

460V Series

HP 0.5 1.0 2.0

2.2

3.0

3.7

5.0

Pr.00.00 3 5 7 9 11

Rated Output

Current (A)

Max. Carrier

Frequency

5.5

7.5

13

7.5 11

10 15

15 17

15

20

19

18.5

25

21

22

30

23

1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.5 13 18 24 32 38 45

15kHz

00.02

Parameter Reset

Factory Setting: 0

Settings 0 Parameter can be read/written

1 All parameters are read-only

6 Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

9 All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or

220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12)

10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 115V/220V/440V)





This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records (Pr.06.08 ~ Pr.06.12).

50Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 50Hz and Pr.01.02 will be set by Pr.00.12.

60Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 60Hz and Pr.01.02 is set to 115V, 230V or 460V.

When Pr.00.02=1, all parameters are read-only. To write all parameters, set Pr.00.02=0.

When Pr.00.02=6, it clears all PLC program. But this function is NOT for VFD*E*C models.

When the parameter settings are abnormal, all parameters can be reset to factory setting by setting Pr.00.02 to 9 or 10.

When Pr.00.02=9, all parameters are reset to factory setting for 50Hz users and voltage will be different by Pr.00.12 setting.

When Pr.00.02=10, all parameters are reset to factory setting for 60Hz users.

Related parameter: Pr.00.12 (50Hz Base Voltage Selection)

NOTE

When Pr.00.02=9 or 10, all parameter are reset to factory setting but it doesn’t clear all PLC program.

Only Pr.00.02=6 can clear all PLC program.

00.03

Start-up Display Selection

Settings 0 Display the frequency command value (Fxxx)

Factory Setting: 0

1 Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)

2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor

(Axxx)

3 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx)

5 PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)


This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.

For setting 5, PLC0: disable, PLC1: run PLC, PLC2: read/write PLC programs into AC motor drive.

Please refer to Pr.00.04 for multi-function display.

Related parameter: Pr.00.04 (Content of Multi-function Display)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


00.04

Content of Multi-function Display

Settings 0 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory Setting: 0

1 pulses on TRG terminal (c)

5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in % (b)

12 Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)

13 Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)

14 Display PG speed in RPM (G)

15 Display motor number 00~03 (M)

When Pr00.03 is set to 03, the display is according to the setting of Pr00.04.

When Pr.00.04 is set to 0, please refer to Pr.00.05 for details.

Related parameter: Pr.00.05 (User Defined Coefficient K)





NOTE

Please refer to Appendix B.8 KPE-LE02 for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad.

00.05

User Defined Coefficient K

Settings 0. 1 to 160.0 Factory Setting: 1.0

The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit.

The display value is calculated as follows:

U (User-defined unit) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00.05)

Example:

If user wants to use RPM to display the motor speed when 4-polse motor runs at 60Hz. The user can display the motor speed by setting Pr.00.04 to 0. The application is shown as follows.

From the formula of motor speed, user-defined unit (U) (RPM) = 60X120/4=1800 (disregard slip). Therefore, User Defined Coefficient K is 30.0.

NOTE

Formula of motor speed

n

=

f

×

120

P

n: speed (RPM) (revolution per minute)

P: pole number of motor f: operation frequency (Hz)

00.06

Power Board Software Version

00.07

Control Board Software Version

00.08

Password Input

Settings 0 to 9999

Display 0~2 (times of wrong password)

Factory Setting: 0

The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00.09. Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “codE” will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.

Related parameter: Pr.00.09 (Password Set)

Password Decode Flow Chart

Decode

00.08

input password

If the password is corr ec t?

Displays 0 when enter ing cor rect password into

Pr.00.08.

END

3 c hanc es to enter the corr ect password.

1st time displays "1" if password is incorr ec t.

2nd time dis plays "2", if password is incorr ec t.

3rd ti me displays " c ode"

(bli nk ing)

If the password was entered incor rectly after three tries , the keypad wi ll be locked.

Turn the power OF F /O N to re- enter the password.

00.09

Password Set

Settings

Display

0 to 9999

0

Factory Setting: 0

No password set or successful input in Pr. 00.08

1 Password has been set

To set a password to protect your parameter settings.

If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00.08.

All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00.09.

The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display will show 1.

Be sure to record the password for later use.

To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr.

00.08.

The password consists of min. 1 digits and max. 4 digits.





How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00.08:

Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00.09 (Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one).

Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.

To lock parameters, you can set Pr.00.02 to 1 or Pr.04.05~04.08 to 17 to prevent changing of parameters settings by unqualified personnel. Please note that it is without password set.

00.10

Control Method

0 Control

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive.

Control of V/f (Voltage/frequency)

1. To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor: it can run by open-loop method and also can use with PG card (refer to

Appendix B) to run by close-loop method. In this control, it gets the change of the electromagnetic torque of rotor and the load torque from the change of slip ratio.

2. The V/f control is the constant value control mode. Although it prevents the main questions of the decreasing frequency and increasing magnetic field, the magnetic field is decreasing with frequency. In such circumstance, insufficient motor torque will occur when the magnetic field weakens in the low frequency. At this moment, it can get the best operation with Pr.07.02 setting(Torque Compensation) to get the torque compensation. common applications: pump, conveyor belt, compressor and treadmill

Vector

1. To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor: it can run by open-loop method and also can use with PG card (refer to

Appendix B) to run by close-loop method. In this mode, it is coordinate change. The physical essence is the relativity of motion. That means the change of rotor current only has relation with electromagnetic torque and the change of stator current only has relation with electromagnetic torque. This is the characteristic of vector control.

2.The vector control can eliminate the relation between electromagnetic current vector and armature flux. Thus, it can control the current vector and armature flux independently to raise


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 4 Parameters| the transient response of the AC motor drive.

Applications: textile equipment, press equipment, life equipment and drilling machine.

Related parameter: Pr.07.02 (Torque Compensation (Motor 0))

00.11

Reserved

00.12

50Hz Base Voltage Selection

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz.

When Pr.00.02 is set to 9, the base voltage for 50Hz will set by Pr.00.12.

Related parameter: Pr.00.02 (Parameter Reset)




Group 1: Basic Parameters

01.00

Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax)

Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz


Unit: Hz

Factory Setting: 60.00

This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V and 4 to 20mA) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.

Please note that output frequency may be not in this setting range due to parameter setting:

1. Pr.00.10 is set to 0: when enabling Pr.07.03 (Slip Compensation) in V/f mode, it may be not in this setting range.

2. Pr.00.10 is set to 1: The AC motor drive will auto compensate slip in vector mode, so it also may be not within this setting range.

Related parameters: 00.10 (Control Method), 04.12(Min AVI Frequency), 04.14(Max AVI

Frequency), 04.16(Min ACI Frequency), 04.18(Max ACI Frequency), 04.19(ACI/AVI2

Selection), 04.21(Min AVI2 Frequency), 04.23(Max AVI2 Frequency) and 07.03(Slip

Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0))

Output

F requenc y

01.00

Max. O utput

Frequenc y

0V(4mA )

10V(20mA)

V/F曲線

01.01

Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0)

Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz

Analog Input

Signal

Unit: Hz


This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03).


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




If this parameter setting is less than the rated frequency of the motor, it may cause over current and damage the motor or trigger the over current protection.

If this parameter setting is greater than the rated frequency of the motor, it may cause insufficient motor torque.

Related parameters: Pr.01.02(Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)), Pr.01.03(Mid-Point

Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 0)), Pr.01.04(Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)), Pr.01.05(Minimum

Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.06(Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0)).

01.02

Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)

Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V

460V series 0.1 to 510.0V

Unit: V



This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum

Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the

Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04).

If the output voltage of the AC motor drive is smaller than this setting, the output voltage can’t reach this setting due to input voltage limit.

If this setting is greater than the rated voltage of the motor, it may cause over current of the motor output to damage motor or trigger the over current protection.

If this setting is smaller than the rated voltage of the motor, it may cause the insufficient motor torque.

Related parameters: Pr.01.01(Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0)), Pr.01.03(Mid-

Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 0)), Pr.01.04(Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)),

Pr.01.05(Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.06(Minimum Output Voltage

(Vmin) (Motor 0)).

01.03

Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 0)


Unit: Hz


This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01.01).





Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over current, it may cause motor overheat and damage motor or trigger the over current protection.

Please note that unsuitable setting may cause insufficient motor torque.

When it is vector control, the settings of Pr.01.03, Pr.01.04 and Pr.01.06 are invalid.

This setting must be greater than Pr.01.05.

Related parameters: Pr.01.01(Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0)),

Pr.01.02(Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)), Pr,01.04(Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid)

(Motor 0)), Pr.01.05(Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.06(Minimum

Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0)).

01.04

Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)



Unit: V



This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined.

This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01.06).


Pr.01.02(Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)), Pr,01.03(Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid)

(Motor 0)), Pr.01.05(Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.06(Minimum

Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0)).

01.05

Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)


Unit: Hz


This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. If the frequency command is greater than this setting, the AC motor drive will accelerate to the frequency command by the accel./decel. time. If the frequency command is less than this setting, the AC motor drive will be ready without output voltage.

Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection.

When Pr.08.04 is set to 1(Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value.), it won’t operate by V/f curve.




CALL NOW 800-985-6929




(Motor 0)), Pr.01.04(Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.06(Minimum Output

Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0))

01.06

Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0)



Unit: V



This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive.

If the setting is too large, it may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection.

If the setting is too small, it may cause insufficient motor torque.

The settings of Pr.01.01 to Pr.01.06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01.02

≥ Pr.01.04 ≥

Pr.01.06 and Pr.01.01

≥ Pr.01.03 ≥ Pr.01.05. By this condition, V/f curve is shown in the following figure.

In vector control mode (Pr.00.10 is set to 1), Pr.01.03, Pr.01.04 and Pr.01.06 are disabled. But

Pr.01.05 is still the minimum output frequency.

The V/f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28. To set the voltage and frequency for each motor, please refer to Pr.01.01~01.06 for motor 0 (factory setting), Pr.01.26~01.31 for motor 1, Pr.01.32~01.37 for motor 2 and Pr.01.38~01.43 for motor 3.



(Motor 0)), Pr.01.04(Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)) and Pr.01.05 (Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)).

Vol tage

0 1.0 2

Maximum

Output

Vol tage

( Vbas e)

0 1.0 4

Mid-point

Vol tage

( Vmid)

4-48

0 1.06

Minimum

Output

Vol tage

(V min)

0 1.0 5

Minimum

Output

F req.

(F min)

0 1.0 3

Mid-point

F req.

(F mid)

V/f Curve

0 1.0 1

Maximum Voltage

F requenc y

(F base)

F requenc y

0 1.0 0

Maximum

Output

F requenc y




01.07

Output Frequency Upper Limit

Settings 0.1 to 120.0%


Unit: %


This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01.08).

The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) is regarded as 100%.

Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.07)/100.

The max. output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting. If the setting of frequency command is greater than Pr.01.07, the output frequency will be equal to or less than

Pr.01.07.

When enabling Pr.07.03 or Pr.10.00~10.13, the output frequency of the AC motor drive may exceed the frequency command but it is still limited by this setting.

Related parameters: Pr.01.00(Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax)) and Pr.01.08(Output

Frequency Lower Limit).

01.08

Output Frequency Lower Limit


Unit: %


The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.08) /100.

This setting will limit the min. output frequency of the AC motor drive. When the frequency command of the AC motor drive or the frequency calculated by feedback control is less than this setting, the output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting.

After starting running, the AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05 (Minimum Output

Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) to the setting frequency by V/f curve and won’t be limited by this setting.

The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage.

If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the

Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz.

If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is set to 1.0Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.0-10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive. If the command frequency is less than 1.0Hz, drive will be in ready status without output.

This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01.07).


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Output frequency http://www.automatedpt.com

01.07

Output frequency upper l imit

01.08

Output frequency lower limit

F requenc y command

01.09

01.10

01.11

01.12

Acceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1)

Deceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1)

Acceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2)

Deceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2)

Settings 0.1 to 600.0 sec / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second


Acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3~

MI12(MI7~MI12 are optional) to 7 (set Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 7 or Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11 to 7). The factory settings are acceleration time 1.

The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output

Frequency (Pr.01.00) down to 0 Hz.

If the setting of the acceleration/deceleration time is too short, it may trigger the protection

(Pr.06.01(Over-Current Stall Prevention during Accel) or Pr.06.00(Over-Voltage Stall

Prevention)) and make the actual acceleration/deceleration time be larger than this setting.

If the setting of the acceleration time is too short, it may cause over-current during acceleration and damage the motor or trigger the protection function.

If the setting of the deceleration time is too short, it may cause over-current during deceleration or over voltage of the AC motor drive and damage the motor or trigger the protection function.

It can use suitable brake resistor to decelerate the AC motor drive in short time and prevent internal over voltage. Refer to Appendix B for brake resistor.

When enabling Pr.01.17(Acceleration S-Curve) and Pr.01.18(Deceleration S-Curve), the actual acceleration/deceleration time will be longer than the setting.





Related parameters: Pr.01.16(Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting)), Pr.01.17(Acceleration S-Curve), Pr.01.18(Deceleration S-Curve), Pr.04.05(Multifunction Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multifunction Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))

01.00

Frequency

Max. output

Frequency

setting

operation frequency

01.05

Min. output frequency Accel. Time

01.09

01.11

Decel. Time

01.10

01.12

The definition of Accel./Decel. Time

01.19

Accel/Decel Time Unit

Settings 0 Unit: 0.1 sec

Time

Factory Setting: 0

The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input

Terminals Settings. See Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for more details.

In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). Suppose the Maximum Output

Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is 1.0 Hz, and

Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83 seconds. ((60-1) * 10/60=9.83secs).


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Frequency

01.00

Max. output

Frequency

setting

operation frequency

01.05

Min. output frequency

01.13

01.14

01.15

0 Hz

Accel. Time

01.09

01.11

Resulting

Accel. Time

Decel. Time

01.10

01.12

The definition of

Accel./Decel. Time

Resulting Accel./Decel. Time

Resulting

Decel. Time

Jog Acceleration Time

Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec

Jog Deceleration Time

Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec

Jog Frequency

Settings 0.10 to Fmax (Pr.01.00)Hz

Time

Unit: second


Unit: second


Unit: Hz


Only external terminal JOG (MI3 to MI12) can be used. Please set one of MI3~MI12

(MI7~MI12 are optional) to 8 for JOG operation. When the Jog command is “ON”, the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) to Jog Frequency

(Pr.01.15). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog

Frequency to zero.

The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog Accel/Decel time (Pr.01.13, Pr.01.14).

Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation, other operation commands are not accepted, except commands via the FORWARD,

REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad.



Frequency

01.15

JOG

Frequency



01.05


0 Hz

JOG Accel. Time

01.13

JOG Decel. Time

01.14

01.12

Time

01.16

Auto-Acceleration / Deceleration

Settings 0

1

2

3

Linear acceleration / deceleration

Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration.

Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration.

Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load)

4

5

6

Factory Setting: 0

Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting)

Linear Accel. controlled by current, linear Decel.

Linear Accel. controlled by current, auto Decel.

Linear acceleration/deceleration: the acceleration/deceleration that acts according to the acceleration/deceleration time set by Pr.01.09~01.12.

With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting/stopping the load.

When Pr.01.16 is set to 3 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load):

During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current.

During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time.

When this parameter is set to 4 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting): the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr.01.09

~Pr.01.12.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




When this parameter is set to 5(Linear Accel. controlled by current, linear Decel.)/6(Linear

Accel. controlled by current, auto Decel.): the current value when the drive performs overcurrent stall prevention can be kept within the setting of stall prevention level. For example, if the setting of stall prevention level is 100%, it will perform deceleration as the current exceeds

100% during operation and keep the current around 100%. Besides, it will perform deceleration no matter over-current occurs during deceleration or constant speed. (The present over-current stall prevention during acceleration is used to keep the output frequency and prevent from the drive overload (OL).

When this parameter is set to 5(Linear Accel. controlled by current, linear Decel.): the drive will perform the linear deceleration by the setting of deceleration time. When this parameter is set to 6 (Linear Accel. controlled by current, auto Decel.), the drive stop the motor by the fastest deceleration time after auto-distinguish load regenerative energy.

Ov er-c ur rent

level

Output cur rent

Speed

Output frequency

Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor.

In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, the deceleration time is the shortest. It is NOT recommended to use Auto deceleration function, or it will extend the deceleration time.

Related parameters: Pr.01.09(Accel Time 1), Pr.01.10(Decel Time 1), Pr.01.11(Accel Time 2) and Pr.01.12(Decel Time 2).

01.17

Acceleration S-Curve

01.18

Deceleration S-Curve

Unit: second

Unit: second

Factory Setting: 0

0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00 S-curve enabled (10.0/10.00 is the smoothest)

This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve.

The S-curve is disabled when set to 0.0 and enabled when set to 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00.





Setting 0.1/0.01 gives the quickest and setting 10.0/10.00 the longest and smoothest S-curve.

The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12.

The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve

(0.1 to 10.0).

The total Accel. Time=Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.17 or Pr.01.11 + Pr.01.17

The total Decel. Time=Pr.01.10 + Pr.01.18 or Pr.01.12 + Pr.01.18

1 2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1 2

Disable S curve

3 4

Enable S curve

Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics

Related parameters: Pr.01.09(Accel Time 1), Pr.01.10(Decel Time 1), Pr.01.11(Accel Time 2) and Pr.01.12(Decel Time 2).

01.20


01.21


01.22


01.23


01.24


01.25


Settings 0.00 to 600.00 sec

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second

Unit: second


This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation distance. When the multi-function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON, it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr.01.20 to Pr.01.25 and get the final position.

This is simple position function NOT the precision position function.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Chapter 4 Parameters| f


MI=25

S

=

n

×

⎛

⎝

t x

+

(

t x

+

t

2

)

2

⎞

⎠ tx t2 n

= f

×

120 p t

S: operation distance n: rotation speed(revolution/second) tx: delay time (sec) t2: deceleration time(sec) n: rotation speed(revolution/second)

P: pole number of motor f: operation frequency

Assume that the radius of the 4-pole motor is r and rotation speed is n (rpm). n r

Example

Assume that motor speed is 50Hz, the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec (Pr.01.25=2) and the deceleration time from 50Hz to 0Hz is 10 seconds.

The rotation speed n = 120 X 50 /4 (rpm/min) = 25 rpm/sec

The revolution numbers = (25 X (2+12))/2 = 175 (revolutions) f

(Hz)

50 t

2sec 10sec

MI=25

ON

Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 175 X 2

π r

It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles.

Example

Assume that motor speed is 1.5Hz, the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec (Pr.01.21=10) and the deceleration time from 60Hz to 0Hz is 40 seconds.





The delay time at 1.5Hz is 1.5 sec and the deceleration from 1.5Hz to 0Hz is 1 sec.

The rotation speed n = 120 X 1.5 /4 (rpm/min) = 1.5/2 rpm/sec = 0.75 rpm/sec

The revolution numbers = (1.5/2X (1.5+2.5))/2 = 1.5 (revolutions) f

(Hz)

1.5

1.5sec

1sec

MI=25

ON

Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 1.5 X 2

π r

It also means that the motor will stop after running 1.5 circles.

01.26



Unit: Hz


01.27




01.28



Unit: V



Unit: Hz


01.29




Unit: V



01.30



01.31




01.32



01.33




01.34



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



Unit: Hz



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




01.35




01.36



01.37




01.38



01.39




01.40



01.41




01.42



01.43




Unit: V



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



Unit: Hz


Unit: V



The V/f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28. To set the voltage and frequency for each motor, please refer to Pr.01.01~01.06 for motor 0 (factory setting), Pr.01.26~01.31 for motor 1, Pr.01.32~01.37 for motor 2 and Pr.01.38~01.43 for motor 3.

Related parameters: Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI6))




Group 2: Operation Method Parameters


02.00

02.09

Source of First Master Frequency Command

Factory Setting: 1

Source of Second Master Frequency Command

Settings 0

1

2

0 to +10V from AVI

4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2

Factory Setting: 0

Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-function Inputs UP/DOWN.

Last used frequency saved. (Digital keypad is optional)

3 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication

These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive.

The factory setting for master frequency command is 1. (digital keypad is optional, please refer to Appendix B for details.)

Setting 2: use the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2. When setting to

AVI, AVI2 is indicated. Please note the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive. Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal (ACI) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 0) and AVI for analog voltage signal (AVI2) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 1).

When the 3 rd

switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram, the source of first master frequency command (Pr.02.00) will force setting to 2. This setting(Pr.02.00) can’t be changed till the 3 rd

switch is set to be OFF.

ON

1 2 3

When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05 for details.

PR.02.09 is only valid when one of Pr.04.05~04.08 is set to 22. When setting 22 is activated, the source of the frequency command is the setting of Pr.02.09. The factory setting of the source of frequency command is the first frequency command. Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time.


Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)), Pr.04.08(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI6)) and Pr.04.19 (ACI/AVI2 Selection)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




02.01

Source of First Operation Command

Settings 0

1

2

3

4

Factory Setting: 1

Digital keypad (Digital keypad is optional)

External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

5 CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.)

When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05/Pr.04.04 for details.

02.10

Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency

Command

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

First Master Frequency + Second Master Frequency

First Master Frequency - Second Master Frequency

It can be used to add or subtract the first frequency set in Pr.02.00 and the second frequency set in Pr.02.09 to meet the customers’ application. For example, if the master frequency is the first frequency, speed source, controlled by ACI (DC 4~20mA) and the second frequency, press source, is controlled by AVI(DC 0~+10V). These two frequencies can be added or subtracted by Pr.02.10.

Related parameters: Pr.02.00(Source of First Master Frequency Command) and

Pr.02.09(Source of Second Frequency Command ).

02.02

Stop Method

Settings

1

2

0

3

STOP: ramp to stop

STOP: coast to stop

STOP: ramp to stop

STOP: coast to stop

Factory Setting: 0

E.F.: coast to stop

E.F.: coast to stop

E.F.: ramp to stop

E.F.: ramp to stop





When the 2 nd

switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram, the motor stop method (Pr.02.02) will force setting to 1. This setting (Pr.02.02) can’t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF.

ON

1 2 3

E.F. is external fault. It can be triggered by setting one of Pr.04.05~04.08 to 14. When the AC motor drive receives the trigger, it will stop output immediately and display EF on the keypad.

The motor won’t run till the fault is cleared (enter “RESET).

The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault.

Ramp:

Coast: the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) according to the deceleration time(Pr.01.10 and Pr.01.12) and then stops. the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.

The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped.

(1)

(2)

It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.

If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select “coast to stop”. For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges and pumps.

Related parameters: Pr.01.10(Decel Time 1), Pr.01.12(Decel Time 2), Pr.04.05(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr. 04.07(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))

NOTE

The digital keypad is optional. Please refer to Appendix B for details. When using without this optional keypad, the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Frequency output frequency motor speed

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Frequency output frequency motor speed http://www.automatedpt.com

operation command

RUN

Frequency stops according to decel eration time

STOP

Time operation command

RUN ramp to stop and free run to stop

Frequency frequency output motor speed frequency output free run to stop

STOP

Time motor speed operation command stops according to decel eration time free run to stop operation command

EF

EF

When Pr.02.02 is set to 2 or 3

When Pr.02.02 is set to 0 or 1

02.03

PWM Carrier Frequency Selections

Power

Setting Range

Factory Setting

115V/230V/460V Series

0.25 to 15hp (0.2kW to 11kW)

1 to 15 kHz

8 kHz

This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.

Unit: Hz




Carrier

Frequency

Acoustic

Noise

Significant

Electromagnetic

Noise or leakage

current

Minimal

Heat


Dissipation

Current

Wave

Minimal Minimal

1kHz

8kHz

15kHz

Minimal

Significant

Significant

Significant

From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.

The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive. It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT’s life. If the user wants to fix carrier within the rated range and won’t change by the change of the surrounding temperature and frequently load. Please refer to Pr.02.18 for Selection of Carrier Modulation.

Related parameters: Pr.02.18(Selection of Carrier Modulation) and Pr.03.08(Fan Control).

02.04

Motor Direction Control

Settings 0 Forward/Reverse operation enabled

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation to prevent damage due to operation errors.

The motor direction also can be limited by setting one of Pr.04.05~04.08 to 21.


Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr. 04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multifunction Input Terminal (MI6))

02.05

Line Start Lockout

Settings 0

1

2

3

Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.

Factory Setting: 1

Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed.

Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source

Pr.02.01 is changed.

Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source

Pr.02.01 is changed.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command source is changed.

Pr.02.05 Start lockout (Run when power is ON)

Operation status when operation command source is changed

0

1

Disable (AC motor drive will run)

Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run)

Keep previous status

Keep previous status

2

3

Disable (AC motor drive will run)

Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run)

Change according to the new operation command source

Change according to the new operation command source

When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON

(NPN mode: MI1/MI2-DCM=closed, PNP mode: MI1/MI2+24V=closed, please refer to chapter

2 wiring for details), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 after power is applied. <For terminals MI1 and MI2 only>

1. When Pr.02.05 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately.

2. When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled.

MI1-DCM (close)

ON

OFF ON power is applied

OFF

ON output frequency

Pr.02.05=0 or 2 it will run output frequency

Pr.02.05=1 or 3 it won't run when power is applied

It needs to received a run command after previous command is cancelled





When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to

Pr.02.05 if the two conditions below are both met.

1. When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02.01=1 or 2)

2. The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different.

And the operation of the AC motor drive will be:

1. When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status.

2. When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status.

MI1-DCM (close)

ON

OFF

Pr.02.01=0

RUN

STO P

RUN

STOP output frequency

Pr.02.05=2 or 3

Change operation command source

Pr.02.01=1 or 2

This action will follow MI1/DCM or MI2/DCM status

(ON is close/OFF is open) output frequency

Pr.02.05=0 or 1

When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, it does not guarantee that the motor will never run under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch.

Related parameters: Pr.02.01(Source of First Operation Command)

02.06

Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA)

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

Coast to stop and display “AErr”

Continue operation by the last frequency command

This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.

When setting to 1, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad(optional) in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting. The AC motor drive will stop outputting immediately, the motor will free run to stop. Please press “RESET” key to clear it.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




When setting 0 or 2, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad(optional) in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting. If it is set to 0, the motor will decelerate to 0Hz by the setting of deceleration time (Pr.01.10/Pr.01.12). If it is set to 2, the motor will continue to run. For these two settings, the warning message will stop blinking when ACI signal is recovered. Please press “RESET” key to clear it.

Related parameters: Pr.01.10(Decel Time 1) and Pr.01.12(Decel Time 2)

02.07

Up/Down Mode

Settings

1

2

0

3

Factory Setting: 0

By digital keypad up/down keys mode

Based on Accel/Decel Time acc. to Pr.01.09 to 01.12

Constant speed (acc. to Pr. 02.08)

Pulse input unit (acc. to Pr. 02.08)

This parameter determines the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi-function Inputs when Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 are set to 10 (Up command) or 11 (Down command).

When Pr.02.07 is set to 0, it uses the external terminals UP/DOWN key to increase/decrease the frequency (F) as shown at the right of the following figure. Its function is the same as the

UP/DOWN key on the digital keypad. In this mode, it also can use UP/DOWN key on the keypad to control.

Frequency frequency command

UP

Ml3

Time

DOWN Ml4

External terminal

UP key

ON

OFF DCM

VFD-E

When Pr.02.07 is set to 1: increase/decrease the frequency by acceleration/deceleration settings(Pr.01.09~01.12). It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running.





Frequency frequency command increase by accel. time

Time multi-function input set to 10 (UP command)

ON

OFF

When Pr.02.07 is set to 2: use multi-function input terminal ON/OFF to increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08.

Frequency frequency command increase by 0.01-10.00Hz/2ms


ON OFF time for ON needs >2ms

When Pr.02.07 is set to 3: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08 (unit: pulse input).

Every ON after OFF is regarded as a input pulse.

Frequency frequency command by Pr.02.08 setting


ON

ON

OFF

Related parameters: Pr.02.08(Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with

Constant Speed), Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input

Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)), Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input

Terminal (MI6))

02.08

Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with

Constant Speed

Settings 0.01~10.00 Hz/2ms

Unit: Hz/2ms



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




This parameter determinates the constant speed When Pr.02.08 is set to 2 or 3.

02.11

Keypad Frequency Command Unit: Hz

Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00

This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command.

Related parameters: Pr.02.12 (Communication Frequency Command)

02.12

Communication Frequency Command Unit: Hz


This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command.

It can use this parameter for remote control via communication.

02.13

The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command

Settings 0

1

2

Factory Setting: 0

Save Keypad & Communication Frequency

Save Keypad Frequency only

Save Communication Frequency only (Not for VFD*E*C model)

This parameter is used to save keypad or RS-485 frequency command.

Setting 0: After the AC motor drive is power off, save keypad and communication frequency in the AC motor drive.

Setting 1: After the AC motor drive is power off, only save keypad frequency in the AC motor drive and won’t save communication frequency.

Setting 2: After the AC motor drive is power off, only save communication frequency in the AC motor drive and won’t save keypad frequency.

The keypad or communication frequency only can be saved when Pr. 02.00/Pr.02.09=0 (the source of frequency is from keypad) or Pr.02.00/Pr.02.09=3(the source of frequency is from communication).

Related parameters: Pr.02.00(Source of First Master Frequency Command) and

Pr.02.09(Source of Second Frequency Command).




02.14

Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485/USB)

Settings 0

1

2

By Current Freq Command

By Zero Freq Command

By Frequency Display at Stop

02.15

Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485/USB)

Settings 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz

02.16

Display the Master Freq Command Source


These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop:

When setting Pr.02.14 to 0: the initial frequency will be current frequency.

When setting Pr.02.14 to 1: the initial frequency will be 0.

When setting Pr.02.14 to 2: the initial frequency will be Pr.02.15.

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: Hz


Settings Read Only Factory display: 1

You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter.

Display Value Bit Function

1

2

Bit0=1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00).

Bit1=1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09).

4 Bit2=1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi-input function

Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command

8 Bit3=1


When it displays 4, it means that the master frequency command source is from multi-input function. Thus, when Pr.04.05~04.08 are set to 1(Multi-Step speed command 1), 2(Multi-Step speed command 2), 3(Multi-Step speed command 3), 4(Multi-Step speed command 4), 8(Jog

Operation), 10(Up: Increment master frequency) and 11(Down: Decrement master frequency), it displays 4 in Pr.02.16.

Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)),

Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)), Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




02.17

Display the Operation Command Source

Settings Read Only

You can read the operation source by this parameter.

Display Value Bit Function

Factory display: 4

4

8

1

2

Bit0=1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad

Bit1=1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication

Bit2=1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal

Bit3=1 Operation Command Source by Multi-input function

Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command

16 Bit4=1


32 Bit5=1 Operation Command Source by CANopen Communication Interface

When it displays 8, it means that the operation command source is from multi-input function.

Thus, when Pr.04.05~04.08 are set to 8(Jog Operation), 18(Operation command selection

(external terminals)), 19(Operation command selection(keypad)), 20(Operation command selection (communication)) and 21(FWD/REV command), it will display 8 in Pr.02.17.

Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)),

Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)), Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))

02.18

Selection for Carrier Modulation

Settings 0

1 By carrier modulation of load current

Factory Setting: 0

By carrier modulation of load current and temperature

Setting 0: The PWM carrier frequency (Fc) will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive. Please refer to the following figure for the decreasing the PWM carrier frequency. It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the

AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT’s life. Example for 460V models:

Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz, the ambient temperature is 35 degrees C with a single AC motor drive(mounting method A). If the output current exceeds 80% * rated current,




Chapter 4 Parameters| the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following figure. If output current is 100% * rated current, the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz.

Mounting method

Method A

Frame A Frame B & C

120mm 150mm

Method B

Frame A

120mm 150mm

Frame B & C

The relation between rated current and carrier frequency

100%

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

℃

℃

℃

℃

2kHz

4kHz

6kHz

8kHz

10kHz

14kHz 15kHz

12kHz

For 115V/230V Series

Carrier

Frequency


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




100%

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

℃

℃

℃

℃

2kHz

4kHz

6kHz

8kHz

10kHz 14kHz15kHz

12kHz

For 460V Series

Carrier

Frequency

Setting 1: to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT’s life and also prevent carrier change and motor noise due to surrounding temperature and frequently load change, it needs to use this setting. Please refer to the following figure for the selection of carrier frequency and rated current. For example, when carrier frequency should be kept in

15Hz, the rated current of the AC motor drive must be 65%. That means the rated current for over load is 150% * 65% =97.5%. Thus, the rated current should be within the range of the following figure to keep the carrier frequency at a fix frequency.

Related parameter: Pr.02.03 (PWM Carrier Frequency Selections)

100

95

90

85

80

75

70

65

60

Carri er frequency (k Hz )




Group 3: Output Function Parameters

03.00

Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)

03.01

Multi-function Output Terminal MO1

Settings Function

0

1

No Function

AC Drive Operational

2

4

5

Master Frequency (F)

Attained

Over-Torque

Detection(OL2)

Baseblock (B.B.)

Indication


Description

Factory Setting: 8

Factory Setting: 1

Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”.

Active when the output frequency(H) of AC motor drive reaches the output frequency(F) setting.

Active when Command Frequency is lower than the

Minimum Output Frequency.

Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03

~ Pr.06.05)

Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function input (setting 09).

7

Operation Mode

Indication

Active when operation command is controlled by external terminal.

Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3,

HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).

9

Desired Frequency 1

Attained

Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.02) is attained.

10

Terminal Count Value

Attained

Active when the internal counter reaches Terminal Count

Value.

11

12

Preliminary Count Value

Attained

Active when the internal counter reaches Preliminary Count

Value.

Over Voltage Stall supervision

Active when the Over Voltage Stall function(Pr.06.00) operating


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Settings

13

Function

Over Current Stall supervision

14

15

Heat Sink Overheat

Warning

Description

Active when the Over Current Stall function(Pr.06.01,

Pr.06.02) operating

When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off the drive. When it is higher than 85 o

C (185 o

F), it will be ON.

Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level

Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal (Refer to

Pr.10.12 and Pr.13.)

19

20

21

23

Desired Frequency 2

Attained

Active when the direction command is REV

Zero Speed Output

Signal

Brake Control (Desired

Frequency Attained)

Active when the drive is standby or stop

Communication Warning

(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE,

SAvE)

Active when there is a Communication Warning

Active when output frequency output frequency

≥Pr.03.11. Deactivated when

≤Pr.03.12 after STOP command.

Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected.

Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.14) is attained.

03.02

Desired Frequency 1 Attained

03.14

Desired Frequency 2 Attained


Unit: 0.01

Unit: 0.01


If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 1(Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01=09), then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr.03.02 setting.

If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 2(Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01=23), then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr.03.14 setting.





Related parameters: Pr.03.00(Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)) and

Pr.03.01(Multi-function Output Terminal MO1)

F requenc y master frequency

2Hz detec ti on range desir ed frequency

03.02/03.14

waiting time for frequency

4Hz detec ti on range

-2Hz detec ti on range

DC brak e time during stop

Time run/stop setting 2 master freq. attained

(output signal) setting 9/23 desir ed freq. attai ned setting 03 z ero s peed indication

OF F

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OF F

OF F

ON ON

setting 19 z ero s peed indication

ON

OFF

ON

outp ut t iming ch art of multip le fu nct io n terminals(Pr.03.00/Pr.03.01) wh en settin g to fr eq uen cy att ained or zero sp eed in dicatio n

NOTE

When the output frequency reaches the setting frequency, the detection ranges for the multi-function output terminals are: ±2Hz (from OFF to ON) and ±4Hz (from ON to OFF). The detection range for the output frequency reaches the desired frequency is -2Hz.

03.03

Analog Output Signal (AFM)

Settings 0

Factory Setting: 0

Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency)

1 Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current)

This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common). Refer to

Pr.03.04 for applications.

Related parameters: Pr.01.00(Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax)) and Pr.03.04(Analog

Output Gain)

03.04

Analog Output Gain

Settings 1 to 200%

Unit: %

Factory Setting: 100

This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




When Pr.03.03 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency

(Pr.01.00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.

Similarly, if Pr.03.03 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output current of the AC drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.

NOTE

Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V, Pr.

03.04 should be set using the following formula:

Pr. 03.04 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100%

For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03.04 to 50%. If

Pr.03.03 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency.

03.05


Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0

This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter, one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. It can be used in the counter control application.

Upon completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 to

Pr.03.01 set to 10). (the count value will be reset after reaching the setting of Pr.03.05)

Related parameters: Pr.03.00(Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)), Pr.03.01(Multifunction Output Terminal MO1), Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multifunction Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and

Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))

NOTE

When the display shows c555, the drive has counted 555 times. If display shows c555

•, it means that real counter value is between 5,550 and 5,559.

03.06



When the counter value counts from c1 to this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal will be activated.





This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter, one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. Upon completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01 set to 11).

It can be used as an indication for the AC motor drive run in low speed to stop.

Related parameters: Pr.03.00(Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)), Pr.03.01(Multifunction Output Terminal MO1), Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multifunction Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and

Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6)

Example: The timing diagram for Pr.03.05=5 and Pr.03.06=3

2msec

Display

(Pr.00.04=1)

TRG

Counter Trigger


(Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=11)

Ex:03.05=5,03.06=3

2msec

The width of trigger signal should not be less than

2ms(<250 Hz)


(Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=10)

03.07

EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained

Settings 0

1

Terminal count value attained, no EF display

Terminal count value attained, EF active

Factory Setting: 0

The E.F. is external fault. It needs to set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 14 to active the terminal.

If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “EF” message on the display. If this parameter is set to 0 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will continue run.

It is used for choosing stop the AC motor drive or not when the desired value of counter is attained.

NOTE

The digital keypad is optional. When using without the keypad, the “FAULT” LED will be ON when there is fault message or warning indication set by external terminals.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




03.08

Fan Control

Settings

1

2

0

3

Factory Setting: 0

Fan always ON

1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF

Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive stops

Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained

This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan.

Setting 0: fan will be ON after the AC motor drive is power on.

Setting 1: fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will stop.

Setting 2: fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and stops when the AC motor drive stops.

Setting 3: fan will auto detect the temperature of heatsink and operate by the temperature.

When heatsink temperature is higher than 60 o

C, fan will run and the fan will stop once the heatsink temperature is lower than 40 o

C.

03.09

The Digital Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)


Bit0=1: RLY used by PLC

Bit1=1: MO1 used by PLC

Bit2=1: MO2/RA2 used by PLC






The equivalent 8-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each digital output. The value that Pr.03.09 displays is the result after converting 8-bit binary into decimal value.





For standard AC motor drive, it only has 2-bit (bit0 and bit1). When extension card is installed, the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows.

Weights

0=not used

1=Used by PLC

Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Relay 1

MO1

MO2/RA2

MO3/RA3

MO4/RA4

MO5/RA5

MO6/RA6

MO7/RA7

For example: when Pr.03.09 is set to 3 (decimal) = 00000011 (binary) that indicates Relay1 and MO1 are used by PLC. (Pr.03.09= 2

0

+2

1

=3)

0=not used

1=Used by PLC

Weights

Bit

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Relay 1

MO1

MO2/RA2

MO3/RA3

MO4/RA4

MO5/RA5

MO6/RA6

MO7/RA7

03.10

The Analog Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)


Bit0=1: AFM used by PLC



The equivalent 1-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each analog output. The value that Pr.03.10 displays is the result after converting 1-bit binary into decimal value.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Weights

Bit


03.12

Brake Engage Frequency


2 1 0

0=not used

1=Used by PLC

AFM

For

If Pr.03.10 displays 1, it means that AFM is used by PLC.

03.11

Brake Release Frequency

AO1 (optional)

AO2 (optional)

Unit: Hz


Unit: Hz


These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals

(Relay or MO1) by setting Pr.03.00~03.01.

When Pr.03.00~03.01 is set to 21, the multi-function output terminal will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr.03.11. When the AC motor drive stops and the output frequency reaches Pr.03.12, this multi-function output terminal will be activated.



AC/DC

magnetic plate

Motor

E-5

Load

Example:

When using Pr.03.11 and Pr.03.12 are used in life equipment as above figure. The timing figure is shown as follows. The DC brake is used before start-up and after stop. It can have high output torque at the beginning of start-up. The Brake Release Frequency (Pr.03.11) can be set by the requirement. The Brake Engage Frequency (Pr.03.12) can be set by requirement to be used when stopping near 0Hz to prevent vibration of counterforce for smooth operation.





Output frequency (H) setting frequency

03.11

Brake release frequency

03.12

Brake engage frequency

RUN/STOP

DC brake

08.01

DC brake time during start-up

RUN

STOP

DC brake

08.02

DC brake time during stopping

Brake control

(MO1=21)

ON

03.13

Display the Status of Multi-function Output Terminals

Settings Read Only

OFF

Factory display: 255

Bit0: RLY Status

Bit1: MO1 Status







When all output external terminals aren’t activated, Pr.03.13 will display 255 (11111111).

For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function output terminals are falling-edge triggered and Pr.03.13 will display 3 (11) for no action.

Weights

Bit

1 0

0=Active

1=Off

Relay 1

MO1


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




For

If Pr.03.13 displays 2, it means Relay 1 is active.

The display value 2 =bit 1 X 2

1

When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function output terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function output terminals is shown as follows.

Weights

Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0=Active

1=Off

Relay 1

MO1

MO2/RA2

MO3/RA3

MO4/RA4

MO5/RA5

MO6/RA6

MO7/RA7





Group 4: Input Function Parameters

04.00

04.01

Keypad Potentiometer Bias


Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity

Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

04.02

Keypad Potentiometer Gain

04.03


Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion

Enable/Disable

Settings 0

1

No Negative Bias Command

Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled

Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

Pr.04.00~04.03 are used for those applications that use analog voltage signal to adjust the setting frequency. Please refer to the following examples for the details of keypad potentiometer (optional, 0~10V or ±10V).

Example 1: Standard application

This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02.00 to 04. The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer.

60Hz

30Hz

Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.

Potentiometer

Pr.04.00 =0%--Bias adjustment

Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias

Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain

Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command

0Hz

0V

Example 2: Use of bias

5V 10V

This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V the output frequency is

10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached, any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency. (To use the full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external input voltage/current 0-

8.33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz. Thus, the center of the keypad potentiometer is


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




40Hz and the value of external input voltage/current 8.33~10V corresponds to the setting frequency

60Hz. Please refer to example 3 for this part.

60Hz

40Hz


Potentiometer

Pr.04.00 =16. 7%--Bias adjustm ent



Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias com mand

Bias

10Hz

Adjustment

0Hz 0V 5V

8.33V

10V

Gain:100%

Bias adjustm ent:((10Hz/60Hz )/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7%

Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range

This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V, the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V, or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the following examples.

60Hz


Potentiometer

Pr.04.00 =20.0%--Bias adjustment


Pr.04.02 =83.3%--Input gain


Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3%

Bias

10Hz

Adjustment

-2V

XV

0V

5V 10V

Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0%

Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment

This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as example below, you can set Pr. 01.00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results.

Gain adjustment

60Hz

30Hz


Potentiometer





Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%

0Hz 0V 5V

10V




Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment


In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example).

60Hz

54Hz


Potentiometer


Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias



Negative bias 6Hz

0Hz

0V

1V

10V

Gain:100%

Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%

Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range

In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached.

Bias adjustment

60Hz


Potentiometer





Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111%

0Hz

Negative bias 6.6Hz

0V

1V

10V Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%

Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction

In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




0V

60Hz

30Hz

0Hz

FWD


Potentiometer




Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled

5V

30Hz

10V

REV

Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%

60Hz

Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200%

Example 8: Use negative slope

In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal (10V) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction (reverse). This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor.

60Hz

negative slope


Potentiometer

Pr.04.00 =100%--Bias adjustment



Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled

0Hz

0V 10V

Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100%

Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100%

04.11

Minimum AVI Voltage

Settings 0.0 to 10.0V

04.12

Minimum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr.01.00)


04.13

Maximum AVI Voltage


04.14

Maximum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)


04.15

Minimum ACI Current

Settings 0.0 to 20.0mA

04.16

Minimum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)


Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: mA


Unit: %




CALL NOW 800-985-6929

04.17

Maximum ACI Current


04.18

Maximum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)


04.19

ACI Terminal Mode Selection http://www.automatedpt.com


Unit: mA


Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

04.20

Minimum AVI2 Voltage


04.21

Minimum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00)


04.22

Maximum AVI2 Voltage


04.23

Maximum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00)


Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: V


Unit: %


Please note the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive. Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal (ACI) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 0) and AVI for analog voltage signal (AVI2)

(Pr.04.19 should be set to 1). When ACi/AVI switch is not set by Pr.04.19, the keypad (optional) will display fault code “AErr” and needs to press “RESET” to clear it.

The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values. The min and max frequencies are based on Pr.01.00 (during open-loop control) as shown in the following.

01.00

04.14

04.18

04.12

04.16

04.21

04.11

04.15

04.20

04.17

04.22


CALL NOW 800-985-6929 analog input



01.00=60.00 Hz


04.14=70

AVI

04.18=50

ACI

04.12=30

04.16=0

04.11=0V 04.15=4mA analog input

04.13=10V

04.17=20mA

04.04

Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1, MI2) 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation Control Modes

Factory Setting: 0

Settings 0 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP

There are three different types of control modes:

04.04

External Terminal

0

2-wire

FWD /STOP

REV / STOP

FWD/STOP

REV/STOP

MI1:("OPEN":STOP)

("CLOSE":FWD)

MI2:("OPEN": STOP)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E

1

2-wire

FWD/ REV

RUN / STOP

RUN/STOP

FWD/REV

MI1:("OPEN":STOP)

("CLOSE":RUN)

MI2:("OPEN": FWD)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E





04.04

External Terminal

STOP RUN

2 3-wire

04.05

04.06

04.07

04.08

Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)




Settings Function Description

REV/FWD

MI3:("OPEN":STOP)

MI2:("OPEN": FWD)

("CLOSE": REV)

DCM

VFD-E

Factory Setting: 1

Factory Setting: 2

Factory Setting: 3

Factory Setting: 4

Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they have no effect on operation.

1

2

3

4

Multi-Step Speed

Command 1

Multi-Step Speed

Command 2

Multi-Step Speed

Command 3

Multi-Step Speed

Command 4

These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to

Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table.

NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output speed by programming the AC motor drive’s internal PLC function. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including

Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for application.

The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





7

Accel/Decel Time

Selection

Command

When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed.

Frequency setting frequency accel. inhibit accel . i nhibi t actual operation frequency decel. inhibit actual operation

frequency decel. inhibit

Time

ON ON

ON

ON

MIx-GND operation command

ON OFF

Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to

Pr.01.12).

Frequency setting frequency

01.09

00.10

01.11

01.09

01.12

01.12

8

Jog Operation

Control operation command

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Time

Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input

Terminals MI3

∼ MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) for Jog control.

NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter

Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15)

01.15

Jog frequency

01.05


MIx-GND

Jog accel. time

01.13

ON OF F





9


External Base

Block

(Refer to Pr. 08.06)

Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for external Base Block control.

NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency.

external base block synchronous speed detection output frequency

Speed searc h starts with last frequency command output voltage

B.B. time

08.07

10

11 speed search

UP: Increase

Master Frequency

DOWN: Decrease

Master Frequency

Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is received or continuously when the input stays active. When both inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This function is also called “motor potentiometer”.


Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to increment the AC drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is incremented by 1.

When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929






Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to be External Fault

(E.F.) inputs.

voltage setting frequency frequency

15

PID function disabled

ON

ON

ON

ON

Time

Reset operation command

OFF

OFF

When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be disabled.

AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC motor drive will restart from 0Hz.

voltage frequency setting frequency

17

Parameter lock enable

Time

ON OF F ON operation command

ON

When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and write parameters is disabled.





18


Operation

Command

Selection (Pr.02.01 setting/external terminals)

ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals

OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting

When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.

19

20

Operation

Command

ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad

Selection (Pr 02.01


When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the setting/Digital

Keypad) priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.

Operation

Command

Selection (Pr 02.01 setting/

Communication)

ON: Operation command via Communication


When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.

This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If

21 Forward/Reverse

“Pr.02.04=0”)

22

23

Source of second frequency command enabled

Run/Stop PLC

Program (PLC1)


Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer to Pr.02.00 and 02.09.

ON: 2 nd

Frequency command source

OFF: 1 st

Frequency command source

ON: Run PLC Program

OFF: Stop PLC Program

When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled, it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC program. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the

PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02.

When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





23

Quick Stop

(ONLY for

VFD*E*C models)

It is only valid when Pr.02.01 is set to 5 in VFD*E*C models.

24

25

Download/Execute/

Monitor PLC

Program (PLC2)


When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled, it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download/execute/monitor PLC. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02.

When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status.

Simple position function

This function should be used with Pr.01.20~Pr.01.25 for simple position. Refer to Pr.01.25 for details.

26

27

28

OOB (Out of

Balance Detection)

The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with

PLC for washing machine. When this setting is enabled, it will get

Δθ value from the settings of Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ value (Pr.08.23)

Motor selection (bit

0)

Motor selection (bit

1)

When this setting is enabled, it can be used for motor selection

(Pr. 01.01~01.06, 01.26~01.43, 07.18~07.38, 07.00~07.06).

For example: MI1=27, MI2=28

When MI1 and MI2 are OFF, it selects motor 0.

When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF, it selects motor 1.

When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON, it selects motor 2.

When MI1 and MI2 are ON, it selects motor 3.

Multi-Step





05.07

Frequency

05.06

05.08

05.05

05.09

05.04

05.10

05.03

05.11

05.02

05.01

05.12

JOG Freq.

01.15

05.13

05.00

05.14

Master Speed

Run/Stop

PU/external terminals

/communication

(

( MI3 to MI6 1)

2nd speed

MI3 to MI6

3rd speed

( MI3 to MI6

2)

3)

4th speed

( MI3 to MI6 4)

Jog Freq.

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

1

OFF ON

2

ON

ON

3 4 5

ON

ON

6 7

ON

ON

ON

8 9

ON

10 11 12 13 14 15

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Multi-speed via External Terminals

MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1

1 st

speed

2 nd

speed

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

3 rd

speed

4 th

speed

5 th

6 th

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF speed OFF ON OFF ON speed OFF ON ON OFF

7 th

speed

8 th

speed

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

9 th

10 th speed ON OFF OFF ON speed ON OFF ON OFF

11 th

speed

12 th

speed

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

13 th

speed ON ON OFF ON

14 th

speed

15 th

ON ON ON OFF speed ON ON ON ON

04.09

Multi-function Input Contact Selection



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




This parameter can be used to set the status of multi-function terminals (MI1~MI6 (N.O./N.C.) for standard AC motor drive).

The MI1~MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal

(2/3wire).

Weights

Bit

5 4 3 2 1 0

0=N.O

1=N.C

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

The Setting method: It needs to convert binary number (6-bit) to decimal number for input.

For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be N.C. and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be N.O. The setting value Pr.04.09 should be bit5X2

5

+bit4X2

4

+bit2X2

2

= 1X2

5

+1X2

4

+1X2

2

= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.

Weights

Bit

1 1 0 1 0 0

0=N.O

1=N.C

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

The setting value

5 4

= bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2

2

5 4

= 1x2 +1x2 +1x2

=32+16+4

=52

Setting 04.09

NOTE:

14 13 12 11 10

2 =16384 2 =8192 2 =4096 2 =2048 2 =1024

4 3 2 1 0

2 =16 2 =8 2 =4 2 =2 2 =1

When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is shown as follows.




Weights

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


0=N.O

1=N.C

0

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9

MI10

MI11

MI12

04.10

Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time

Settings 1 to 20

Unit: 2ms

Factory Setting: 1

This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals MI1~MI6.

This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc. The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction.

The AC motor drive will check the status of multi-function input terminals every 2ms. It will only confirm the command and change the status when the input terminals status is changed. Thus, the delay time from command input to execution is 2msec+ (Pr.04.10+1) X 2ms. Suppose that

Pr.04.10 is set to 4, the delay time will be 12ms.

04.24

The Digital Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Display Bit0=1: MI1 used by PLC












For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the equivalent 6-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each digital input. The value for Pr.04.24 to display is the result after converting 6-bit binary into decimal value.

Weights

Bit

5 4 3 2 1 0

0=not used

1=used by PLC

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

For example: when Pr.04.24 is set to 52 (decimal) = 110100 (binary) that indicates MI3, MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC.

Weights

Bit

1 1 0 1 0 0

0=OFF

1=ON

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

When extension card is installed, the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows.




Weights

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


0=not used

1=Used by PLC

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9

MI10

MI11

MI12

04.25

The Analog Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)


Display Bit0=1: AVI used by PLC

Bit1=1: ACI/AVI2 used by PLC



The equivalent 2-bit is used to display the status(used or not used) of each analog input. The value for Pr.04.25 to display is the result after converting 2-bit binary into decimal value.

Weights

Bit

3 2

0=not used

1=used by PLC

AVI

ACI/AVI2

AI1 (optional)

AI2 (optional)

04.26

Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

Factory display: 63 Settings Read Only

Display Bit0: MI1 Status

Bit1: MI2 Status

Bit2: MI3 Status

Bit3: MI4 Status

Bit4: MI5 Status


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Bit5: MI6 Status

Bit6: MI7 Status

Bit7: MI8 Status

Bit8: MI9 Status

The multi-function input terminals are falling-edge triggered. For standard AC motor drive

(without extension card), there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr.04.26 will display 63 (111111) for no action.

Weights

Bit

5 4 3 2 1 0

0=Active

1=off

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

For

If Pr.04.26 displays 52, it means MI1, MI2 and MI4 are active.

The display value 52= 32+16+4 =1 X 2

5

+ 1X 2

4

+ 1X 2

2

= bit 6 X 2

5

+ bit 5 X 2

4

+ bit 3 X 2

2

Weights

Bit

0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

0=Active

1=Off

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9





Weights

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

04.27

Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection

Settings 0 to 4095

1


0=Active

1=Off

0

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9

MI10

MI11

MI12

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal. You can activate internal terminals by Pr.04.28. A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time.

For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are

MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following.

Weights

Bit

5 4 3 2 1 0

0=external terminal

1=internal terminal

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input.

For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be external terminals. The setting value should be bit5X2

5

+bit4X2

4

+bit2X2

2

= 1X2

5

+1X2

4

+1X2

2

=

32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Weights

Bit

1 1 0 1 0 0

0=external terminal

1=internal terminal

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6


Weights

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0=external terminal

1=internal terminal

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9

MI10

MI11

MI12

04.28

Internal Terminal Status


This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad(optional), communication or PLC.

For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are

MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following.

Weights

Bit

5 4 3 2 1 0

0=set internal terminal to be OFF

1= set internal terminal to be

MI1

ON

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6





For example, if setting MI3, MI5 and MI6 to be ON, Pr.04.28 should be set to bit5X2

5

+bit4X2

4

+bit2X2

2

= 1X2

5

+1X2

4

+1X2

2

= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.

Weights

Bit

1 1 0 1 0 0

0=OFF

1=ON

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6


Weights

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0=set internal terminal to be OFF

1=set internal terminal to be ON

MI1

MI2

MI3

MI4

MI5

MI6

MI7

MI8

MI9

MI10

MI11

MI12


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Group 5: Multi-step Speeds Parameters

05.07

05.08

05.09

05.10

05.11

05.12

05.13

05.14

05.00

05.01

05.02

05.03

05.04

05.05

05.06

1st Step Speed Frequency

2nd Step Speed Frequency

3rd Step Speed Frequency

4th Step Speed Frequency













Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz


The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr.04.05 to 04.08) are used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds(max. 15 speeds). The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05.00 to 05.14 as shown in the following.

The operation time of multi-step speeds can be set by PLC program.

The run/stop command can be controlled by the external terminal/digital keypad/communication via Pr.02.01.

Each one of multi-step speeds can be set within 0.0~600.0Hz during operation.

These parameters can be applied in small machinery, food processing machinery, washing equipment to control the operation procedure. It can be used instead of traditional circuit, such as relay, switch or counter.

Explanation for the timing diagram for multi-step speeds and external terminals

The Related parameter settings are:

1. Pr.05.00~05.14: setting multi-step speeds (to set the frequency of each step speed)

2. Pr.04.05~04.08: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed 1~4)

3. The repeat operation setting of 1st-15th step speed frequency: can use PLC program to control. Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details.





4. The operation direction setting of 1st-15th step speed frequency: can use PLC program to control. Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details.

5. The operation time setting of 1st-15th step speed frequency: can use PLC program to control. Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details.

Operations:

Once the AC motor drive receives “RUN” command, it will operate by parameters settings and

PLC program till the 15th step speed frequency is completed.

If it is repeat operation by PLC program, the AC motor drive will operate by the settings from

Pr.05.00ÎPr.05.01Î…. Î Pr.05.14ÎPr.05.00ÎPr.05.01..till the operation command is OFF.

Related parameters: Pr.01.15(Jog Frequency), Pr.01.07(Output Frequency Upper Limit),

Pr.01.08(Output Frequency Lower Limit), Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)),

Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and

Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))

F requenc y

05.06

05.07

05.08

05.05

05.09

05.04

05.10

05.03

05.11

05.02

05.01

05.00

05.12

05.13

05.14

JOG Freq.

01.15

Master Spee d

Run/ Sto p

PU/ ext ernal t erminals

/commu nicat ion

1st spee d

( MI3 to MI6 1)

2nd sp eed

( MI3 to MI6

3rd spe ed

( MI3 to MI6

2 )

3 )

4t h speed

( MI3 to MI6 4 )

Jog Freq.

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

1

OFF

ON

2

ON

ON

3 4 5

ON

O N

6 7

ON

ON

ON

8 9

ON

10 11 12 13 14 15

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Mu lt i- speed via Ext ernal Termin als

ON


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1

1 st

speed

2 nd

speed

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

3 rd

speed

4 th

speed

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

5 th

6 th speed OFF ON OFF ON speed OFF ON ON OFF

7 th

speed OFF ON ON ON

8 th

speed ON OFF OFF OFF

9 th speed ON OFF OFF ON

10 th speed ON OFF ON OFF

11 th

speed

12 th

speed

13 th

speed

14 th

speed

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

15 th speed ON ON ON ON




Group 6: Protection Parameters


06.00

Over-Voltage Stall Prevention


460V series

0

660.0 to 820.0V

Unit: V



Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or brake resistor)

During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again.

With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake resistor or brake unit should be used.

When the function of over-voltage stall prevention is activated, the deceleration time of the AC motor drive will be larger than the setting.

When the deceleration time is obstruction in the application, it is not suitable to use this function. The solution are:

1. moderate increase the deceleration time

2. used with a brake resistor (refer to appendix B for details) to consume the regenerative energy by heat.

Related parameters: Pr.01.10(Decel Time 1), Pr.01.12(Decel Time 2), Pr.03.00(Multi-function

Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)) and Pr.03.01(Multi-function Output Terminal MO1)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




high voltage at DC side over voltage detection level output frequency

Time frequency Held

Deceleration characteristic when over voltage stall prevention enabled

Time previous deceleration time actual time to decelerate to stop when over voltage stall prevention is enabled

06.01

Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Unit: %

Settings 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170

A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive.

During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr.06.01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value.

When it stalls due to the small motor power or operate with factory setting, please decrease the setting of Pr.06.01.

When the acceleration time is obstruction in the application, it is not suitable to use this function. The solution are:

1. moderate increase the acceleration time

2. setting Pr.01.16 (Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting)) to 1, 3 or 4.





Related parameters: Pr.01.09(Accel Time 1), Pr.01.11(Accel Time 2), Pr.01.16(Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting)), Pr.03.00(Multi-function Output

Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)), Pr.03.01(Multi-function Output Terminal MO1) and Pr.06.03(Over-

Torque Detection Mode (OL2))

06.01

Over-Current

Detection

Level output current setting frequency

Over-Current Stall prevention during

Acceleration, frequency held output current

Time previous acceleration time actual acceleration time when over-current stall prevention is enabled

06.02

Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Settings 20 to 250%

Unit: %


The over-current stall prevention during operation function is a protection. When the motor runs with constant speed, the AC motor drive will decrease the output frequency automatically when momentary overload.

If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06.02 when the drive is operating, the drive will decrease its output frequency by Pr.01.10/Pr.01.12 to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower than (Pr.06.02 setting –rated current X 5%), the drive will accelerate again by Pr.01.09/Pr.01.11 to catch up with the set frequency command value.

Related parameter: Pr.06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




06.02

Over-Current

Detection Level current

06.02

Over-Current Stall

Prevention during

Operation, output frequency decrease

06.02-rated current X 5%

Output

Frequency decrease by decel. time

Time

over-current stall prevention during operation

NOTE

Please do not set the over-current stall prevention to a small value to prevent over-low torque.

06.03

Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2)

Settings 0

1

2

3

4

Factory Setting: 0

Over-Torque detection disabled.

Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.

After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.

Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.

After over-torque is detected, stop running.

Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.

Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, stop running.

This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2)

This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is detected via the following method:

1. if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.04) and the detection time is longer than the setting of Pr.06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning message

“OL2” is displayed on digital keypad (optional). It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

2. If a Multi-function Output Terminal is set to over-torque detection (Pr.03.00~03.01=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00~03.01 for details.





Setting 1 or 2: it is used to detect with constant speed. For setting 2, it will free run to stop after over-torque is detected.

Setting 3 or 4: it is used to detect during acceleration. For setting 4, it will free run to stop after over-torque is detected.

Related parameters: Pr.03.00(Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)), Pr.03.01(Multifunction Output Terminal MO1), Pr.06.01(Over-Current Stall Prevention during Accel),

Pr.06.02(Over-Current Stall Prevention during Operation) Pr.06.04(Over-Torque Detection

Level) and Pr.06.05(Over-Torque Detection Time)

06.04

Over-Torque Detection Level (OL2)

Settings 10 to 200%

06.05

Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2)


Unit: second


Pr.06.04 is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive.

Pr.06.05 sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is displayed.

The method to detect over-torque is shown as follows:

Unit: %


1. when output current exceeds over-torque detection level (Pr.06.04)

2. when over-torque time exceeds over torque detection time (Pr.06.05)

If a Multi-function Output Terminal is set to over-torque detection (Pr.03.00~03.01=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00~03.01 for details.

For general motor, the output torque and output current of the AC motor drive will in proportion in V/f control. Thus, it can use the output current of the AC motor drive to limit the output torque of motor.



06.06

Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1)

Factory Setting: 2

Settings 0

1

Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)

Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling)

This parameter is used to set the operation selection of the electronic thermal overload relay.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating. When the motor

(self-cooled by fan) operates in low frequency, overload is seldom happened. Refer to the following figure for the application.

When the rated current of motor is less than drive’s or bad design of the motor heat dissipation, it can use this parameter to limit the output current of the AC motor drive to prevent motor from overheating or damage.

Setting 0: the electronic thermal relay is used for standard motor(heatsink is fixed on rotor shaft). When operating in low speed, the motor heat dissipation function will be bad. Thus, it needs to decrease the action time of the electronic thermal relay to ensure the motor life.

Setting 1: the electron thermal relay is used for special motor(heatsink uses independent power). The heat dissipation function has no direction relation with rotation speed. Thus, the electronic thermal relay is still held in low speed to ensure the motor load ability in low speed.

In the frequent power ON/OFF applications, it can’t use this parameter (even set to 0 or 1) for protection due to this function will be reset once the power is OFF. Thus, it needs to add the thermal relay on each motor when an AC motor drive is connected with several motors.

Setting 0 or 1: when the electronic thermal relay protection is enabled in low speed operation, the AC motor drive will display “OL1” and free run to stop. It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Related Pr.06.07(Electronic Thermal Characteristic)

100

80

60

40

20

100

80

60

40

20

25 50 100 rated frequency of the motor %

Standard motor

(self-cooled by fan)

150 25 50 100 rated frequency of the motor %

Special Motor

(forced external cooling)

150

NOTE

When the standard motor operates in low speed with rated current, the motor overload protection will occur easily. Thus, please use the special motor when operates in low speed with rated current.

Refer to Appendix C.3 How to choose a suitable motor for motor selection.




06.07

Electronic Thermal Characteristic

Settings 30 to 600 sec


Unit: second

Factory Setting: 60

The parameter determines the time required for activating the I

2 t electronic thermal protection function by the output frequency/current of the AC motor drive and operation time to prevent motor from overheating.

The electronic thermal overload relay acts by Pr.06.06 setting:

1. Pr.06.06 is set to 0(Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)): when the output current is greater than (Pr.07.00 Motor Rated Current (Motor 0)X (the corresponding motor rated current % of motor rated frequency in standard motor figure in Pr.06.06) X150%), the AC motor drive will start to count time. When accumulated time exceeds Pr.06.07(Electronic

Thermal Characteristic) setting, the electronic thermal overload relay protection (OL1) will be

ON.

2. Pr.06.06 is set to 1(Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling)): when the output current is greater than (Pr.07.00 Motor Rated Current (Motor 0)X (the corresponding motor rated current % of motor rated frequency in special motor figure in Pr.06.06) X150%), the AC motor drive will start to count time. When accumulated time exceeds Pr.06.07(Electronic

Thermal Characteristic) setting, the electronic thermal overload relay protection (OL1) will be

ON.

The actual action time of electronic thermal characteristic will be adjusted by the output current of the AC motor drive (motor load rate %). For large current, it needs short time to activate the

I

2 t electronic thermal protection function. For small current, it needs long time to activate the I

2 t electronic thermal protection function as shown in the following figure.

Related parameters: Pr.06.06(Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection) and

Pr,07.00(Motor Rated Current (Motor 0))

NOTE

Please refer to Pr.06.06(Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1)) for curve figure of standard motor and special motor.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



3 00

2 50

2 00

1 50

1 00

5 0


F=60Hz or above

F=40Hz

F=20Hz

F=50Hz

0

0

5 0

1 00

Load factor (%)

1 50

2 00





06.08

Present Fault Record

06.09

Second Most Recent Fault Record

06.10

Third Most Recent Fault Record

06.11

Fourth Most Recent Fault Record

06.12

Fifth Most Recent Fault Record

Factory Setting: 0

4

8

9

10

11

12

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

24

25

26

Power Board Overheat (oH2)

External Fault (EF)

Hardware protection failure (HPF)

Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA)

Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd)

Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn)

Auto accel/decel failure (CFA)

Software/password protection (codE)

Power Board CPU WRITE Failure (cF1.0)

Power Board CPU READ Failure (cF2.0)

CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)

OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)

GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)

OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)

U-phase error (cF3.0)

V-phase error (cF3.1)

W-phase error (cF3.2)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




29

30

31

32

34

35

40

Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)

Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1)

Contrsol Board CPU READ failure (cF2.1)

ACI signal error (AErr)

Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)

PG feedback signal error (PGEr)

Communication time-out error of control board and power board

(CP10)

42 ACL (Abnormal Communication Loop)

In Pr.06.08 to Pr.06.12 the five most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive.




Group 7: Motor Parameters

07.00

Motor Rated Current (Motor 0)

Settings 30% FLA to 120% FLA


Unit: A

Factory Setting: FLA

Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter:

(Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100% with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A on type shield

AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00.01)

Pr.07.00 must be greater than Pr.07.01.

Example: Suppose that the rated current of 460V/2.0HP(1.5kW) is 4.2A with the factory setting

4.2A. The range that user can set is from 1.3A(4.2X30%) to 5.0A(4.2X120%). But when

Pr.07.00 is set to less than 1.7A(4.2X40%), it needs to set Pr.07.01 to be less than 30% FLA first. In this way, Pr.07.00 is greater than Pr.07.01.

Pr.07.00 and Pr.07.01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode (Pr.00.10 = 1). They also must be set if the "Electronic Thermal Overload Relay"

(Pr.06.06) or "Slip Compensation"(Pr.07.03 and Pr.07.06) functions are selected.

The full-load current should be less than the rated current of the AC motor drive and should be greater than 1/2 rated current of the AC motor drive.

Related parameters: Pr.00.01(Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive),

Pr.06.06(Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection), Pr.06.07(Electronic Thermal

Characteristic), Pr.07.01(Motor No-Load Current (Motor 0)), Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation

(Used without PG) (Motor 0)) and Pr.07.06(Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0))

07.01

Motor No-load Current (Motor 0)


Unit: A

Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA

This parameter is used to set the motor no-load current. The user must input motor no-load current by the motor nameplate. The factory setting be set to 40% X the rated current of the

AC motor drive (refer to Pr.00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive).

Example: Suppose that the rated current of 460V/2.0hp(1.5kW) is 4.2A with factory setting

4.2A. The motor no-load current is 1.7A(4.2X40%) and it should set Pr.07.01 to 1.7.

This parameter must be set if the "Electronic Thermal Overload Relay" (Pr.06.06) or "Slip

Compensation"(Pr.07.03 and Pr.07.06) functions are selected.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




If the motor no-load current can’t be read from the nameplate, operating the AC motor drive after unloading and read it from the digital keypad (optional, refer to Appendix B for details).

The setting value must be less than Pr.07.00 (Motor Rated Current).

Related parameters: Pr.00.01(Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive), Pr.07.00(Motor

Rated Current (Motor 0)), Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)) and

Pr.07.06(Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0))

07.02

Torque Compensation (Motor 0)

Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 0.0

For the induction motor characteristic, parts of the drive output voltage will be absorbed by the impedance of stator windings when motor load is large. In this circumstance, the output current will be too large and output torque is insufficient due to the motor voltage at inductance end of motor is insufficient and insufficient air-gap magnetic field. Using this parameter, it will auto adjust output voltage by the load to get the best operation with the air-gap magnetic field is held.

In V/f control mode, the voltage will decrease by the decreasing frequency. It will cause lower torque in low speed due to less AC impedance and constant DC resistor. Thus, this parameter can be set for the AC drive increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque in low speed.

Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.

This parameter is only used for V/f control mode.

Related parameters: Pr.00.10(Control Method) and Pr.07.08(Torque Compensation Time

Constant).

07.03

Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)


When the induction motor generates the electromagnetic torque, it needs the necessary slip.

But the slip can be ignored when it needs only 2-3% slip in higher speed. When the drive operates, the slip and synchronous frequency are in reverse proportion. That is, the slip will be increased with the decreasing synchronous frequency. The slip affects the motor speed seriously in low speed because the motor may stop and can’t run with load when the synchronous frequency is too low.

While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an

4-118 increase in slip and decrease in speed.





This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no-load current (Pr.07.01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter.

When Pr.00.10 is set from V/f mode to vector mode, this parameter will be set to 1.00 automatically. When Pr.00.10 is set from vector mode to V/f mode, this parameter will be set to

0.00. Please using this function after load is added and acceleration with gradual increasing compensation. That is, add the output frequency with Pr.07.06(Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0)) X

Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)) on the output frequency

07.04

Motor Parameters Auto Tuning

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

Auto Tuning R1 (motor doesn’t run)

Auto Tuning R1 + No-load Test (with running motor)

Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2.

When setting to 1, it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr.07.01 must be input manually. When set to 2, the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05 will be set automatically.

The steps for AUTO-Tuning are:

1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.

2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor.

3. Fill in Pr.01.01, Pr.01.02, Pr.07.00, Pr.07.04 and Pr.07.06 with correct values.

4. After Pr.07.04 is set to 2, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after receiving a ”RUN” command. (Note: The motor will run!). The total auto tune time will be

15 seconds + Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.10. Higher power drives need longer Accel/Decel time

(factory setting is recommended). After executing Auto-tune, Pr.07.04 is set to 0.

5. After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05. If not, please press RUN key after setting Pr.07.04 again.

6. Then you can set Pr.00.10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





Pr.01.02(Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)), Pr.07.00(Motor Rated Current (Motor

0)), Pr.07.01(Motor No-Load Current (Motor 0)), Pr.07.05(Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1

(Motor 0)) and Pr.07.06(Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0))

NOTE

1. In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.

2. It is not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive.

07.05

Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 0)

Settings

Ω

Unit: m

Ω

Factory Setting: 0

The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter. The user may also set this parameter without using Pr.07.04.

07.06

Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0)


Unit: Hz


It can be used to set the motor rated slip. Users need to input the actual rated rpm shown on the nameplate of the motor.

Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the following equation to calculate the rated slip.

Rated Slip (Hz) = F base

(Pr.01.01 base frequency) – (rated rpm x motor pole/120)

Example: Assume that the rated frequency of the motor is 60Hz with 4 poles and the rated rpm is 1650rpm. The rated slip calculated by the formula should be 60Hz-(1650X4/120)=5Hz.

This parameter has relation with Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)). To get the best slip compensation effect, it needs to input the correct setting. The incorrect setting may cause the invalid function and even damage the motor and drive.

Related parameter: Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0))

07.07

Slip Compensation Limit

Settings 0 to 250%

Unit: %


This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency (the percentage of

Pr.07.06).





Example: when Pr.07.06=5Hz and Pr.07.07=150%, the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7.5Hz. Therefore, for a 50Hz motor, the max. output is 57.5Hz.

If the motor speed is lower than the target speed and the speed isn’t changed after adjusting

Pr.07.03 setting, it may reach the upper limit of the compensation frequency and need to increase Pr.07.07 setting.

Related parameters: Pr.07.03(Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)) and

Pr.07.06(Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0))

07.08

Torque Compensation Time Constant

Settings 0.01 ~10.00 sec

Unit: second


It is usually applied in those heavy load applications which the motor current is changed frequently. The current is changed for the current compensation to increase the output torque.

Because the frequent current change will cause the machine vibration, it can increase Pr.07.08 setting to solve this problem at this moment.

07.09

Slip Compensation Time Constant

Settings 0.05 ~10.00 sec

Unit: second


It is usually applied in those heavy load applications which the motor speed is changed frequently. The speed is changed for the speed compensation to reach the synchronous speed.

Because the frequent speed change will cause the machine vibration, it can increase Pr.07.09 setting to solve this problem at this moment..

Too long time constants (set Pr.07.08 and Pr.07.09 to 10) give slow response; too short values can give unstable operation. Please set by your applications.

07.10

Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)

Settings 0 Factory Display: 0

07.11

Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)

Settings 0 Factory Display: 0

Pr.07.10 and Pr.07.11 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




When setting Pr.07.11 to 0, it will reset the accumulative motor operation time and the record will be reset to 0.

07.12

Motor PTC Overheat Protection

Factory Setting: 0

07.14

Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level

Settings 0.1~10.0V

Unit: V


When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time, the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower. To prevent overheating, it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive’s corresponding control terminals.

When the source of first/second frequency command is set to AVI (02.00=1/02.09=1), it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection (i.e. Pr.07.12 cannot be set to 1). Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time.

If temperature exceeds the setting level, motor will be coast to stop and is displayed. When the temperature decreases below the level of (Pr.07.15-Pr.07.16) and

stops blinking, you can press RESET key to clear the fault.

Pr.07.14 (overheat protection level) must exceed Pr.07.15 (overheat warning level).

The PTC uses the AVI-input and is connected via resistor-divider as shown below.

The voltage between +10V to ACM: lies within 10.4V~11.2V.

The impedance for AVI is around 47kΩ.

Recommended value for resistor-divider R1 is 1~10kΩ.

Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC.





VFD-E

+10V

resistor-divider

R1

AVI

47kΩ

PTC

ACM

internal circuit

Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level.

Protection level

Pr.07.14= V

+10

* (R

PTC1

//47K) / [R1+( R

PTC1

//47K)]

Warning level

Pr.07.16= V

+10

* (R

PTC2

//47K) / [R1+( R

PTC2

//47K)]

Definition:

V+10: voltage between +10V-ACM, Range 10.4~11.2VDC

RPTC1: motor PTC overheat protection level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.14,

RPTC2: motor PTC overheat warning level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.15,

47kΩ: is AVI input impedance, R1: resistor-divider (recommended value: 1~20kΩ)

Take the standard PTC thermistor as example: if protection level is 1330Ω, the voltage between +10V-ACM is 10.5V and resistor-divider R1 is 4.4kΩ. Refer to following calculation for Pr.07.14 setting.

1330//47000=(1330*47000)/(1330+47000)=1293.4

10.5*1293.4/(4400+1293.4)=2.38(V) ≒2.4(V)

Therefore, Pr.07.14 should be set to 2.4.

1330

550

Tr

Tr-5℃ Tr+5℃


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Related parameters: Pr.02.00(Source of First Master Frequency Command), Pr.02.09(Source of Second Frequency Command), Pr.07.13(Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection),

Pr.07.15(Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level), Pr.07.16(Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta

Level) and Pr.07.17(Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat)

07.15

Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level

Settings 0.1~10.0V

07.16

Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level

Settings 0.1~5.0V

07.17

Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat

Settings 0

1

2

Warn and RAMP to stop

Warn and COAST to stop

Warn and keep running

Unit: V


Unit: V


Factory Setting: 0

If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level (Pr.07.15), the drive will act according to Pr.07.17 and display on the keypad.

Setting Pr.07.17 to 0: When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated, it will display

on the digital keypad and the motor will stop to 0Hz by Pr.01.10/Pr.01.12 setting.


on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop.


on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running.

If the temperature decreases below the result (Pr.07.15 minus Pr.07.16), the warning display

will disappear.

NOTE


07.13

Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection

Settings 0~9999 (is 0-19998ms)

Unit: 2ms






This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc.

07.18



07.19


07.20

07.21



Settings 0.0 to 10.0



07.22


Settings Ω

07.23



07.24

Motor Pole Number (Motor 1)

Settings 2 to 10

07.25



07.26


07.27

07.28






07.29


Settings Ω

07.30



07.31


Settings 2 to 10

07.32



Unit: A


Unit: A




Unit: m

Ω

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: Hz


Factory Setting: 4

Unit: A


Unit: A




Unit: m

Ω

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: Hz


Factory Setting: 4

Unit: A



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




07.33


07.34

07.35






07.36


Settings Ω

07.37



07.38


Settings 2 to 10

Unit: A




Unit: m

Ω

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: Hz


Factory Setting: 4

The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6

(Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28.




Group 8: Special Parameters

08.00

DC Brake Current Level

Settings 0 to 100%


Unit: %

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00.01) is regarded as 100%.

It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved.

Related parameters: Pr.08.01(DC Brake Time during Start-up) and Pr.08.02(DC Brake Time during Stopping)

08.01

DC Brake Time during Start-up


Unit: second


The motor may keep running due to external factor or itself inertia. The over current may damage the motor or activate the drive’s protection when running the drive suddenly. This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop for a stable start.

This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency

(Pr.01.05). The DC brake is invalid when Pr.08.01 is set to 0.

08.02



Unit: second


The motor may keep running due to external factor or itself inertia and can’t stop by requirement. This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop after the drive stops outputting to ensure the motor is stop.

This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02.02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop. The

DC brake is invalid when Pr.08.02 is set to 0.0.

Related parameters: Pr.02.02(Stop Method) and Pr.08.03(Start-Point for DC Brake)

08.03

Start-Point for DC Brake Unit: Hz


This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Output Frequency

Start-Point for

DC Brake

Time duri ng

01.05

Minimum Output

Frequenc y

Stopping

08.03


08.01

Run/S top

08.02

ON

OFF

DC Brake Time

DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion.

DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position, such as cranes and cutting machines. For high inertia loads, a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations. Refer to appendix B for the information of brake resistors.

08.04

Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Last Frequency.

Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency.

This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss.

The power connected to the AC motor drive may be off temporarily with unknown factors. This parameter can restart the drive after momentary power loss.

Setting 1: the drive will operate by the last frequency before momentary power loss. It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output frequency and the motor rotor’s speed are synchronous. It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a large inertia and small resistance to save time by restarting without waiting the flywheel stops completely, such as machinery equipment with a large-inertia flywheel.





Setting 2: the drive will operate by the min. frequency. It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output frequency and motor rotor speed are synchronous. It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a small inertia and large resistance.

When using with PG card, the speed search will start with the actual motor speed detected by the drive and accelerate to the setting frequency (setting 1 and 2 are invalid at this moment).

Related parameters: Pr.08.05(Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time), Pr.08.07(Baseblock

Time for Speed Search (BB)) and Pr.08.08(Current Limit for Speed Search)

08.05

Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time


Unit: second


If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will act by

Pr.08.04 setting. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is then turned off (coast stop).

The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08.04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is

≤20 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.

But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power loss time is

≤20 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08.04 is not executed. In that case it starts up normally.

08.06

Base Block Speed Search

Factory Setting: 1

1

2

Speed search starts with last frequency

Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)

This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled(one of Pr.04.05~04.08 is set to 9).

The speed search actions between Pr.08.04 and Pr.08.06 are the same.

The priority of Pr.08.06 is higher than Pr.08.04. That is, Pr.08.04 will be invalid after Pr.08.06 is set and the speed search will act by Pr.08.06.

Related parameters: Pr.08.07(Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)), Pr.04.05(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI3)), Pr.04.06(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function

Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6))


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Output frequency

(H)

Output voltage(V)

08.08 Current Limit

for Speed SearchSpeed

A

Output current ( A)

Time

Input B.B. signal

Stop output v ol tage

Dis abl e B.B. signal

Wai ting ti me 08.07

Speed Searc h

Synchronization s peed detection

FWD Run

B.B.

Fig 1:B.B. Speed Search with Las t Frequenc y Downward Ti ming Chart

Output frequency

(H)

08.08 Current Limit

for Speed SearchSpeed

A

Input B.B. si gnal

Stop output v oltage

Dis abl e B.B. signal

Wai ting time 08.07

Speed Searc h

Synchronization speed detec tion

Time

FWD Run

B.B.

Fig 2: B.B. Speed Search with Min. Output Frequency Upward Timing C hart

08.07

Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)


Unit: second


When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait for a specified period of time (determined by Pr.08.07, called Base-Block Time) before resuming operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.

This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External

Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault (Pr.08.15).

When using a PG card with PG (encoder), speed search will begin at the actual PG (encoder) feedback speed.





Unit: %

08.08

Current Limit for Speed Search

Settings 30 to 200% Factory Setting: 150

It limits the drive output current during speed search.

When executing speed search, the V/f curve will be by the setting in the group 01.

The level of speed search will affect the speed synchronization time. The larger setting is set and the faster it will reach the speed synchronization. But too large setting may cause overload.

When Pr.08.04 is set to 1: When the speed searches downward, the output frequency starts with the master frequency. The output voltage and output current will be increased from 0.

When the output current reaches Pr.08.08 setting, the output frequency continuous searches downward. When the output frequency, output voltage and V/f setting frequency are the same, it will be regarded as the synchronization reached and accelerate to the master frequency by

V/f curve.

When Pr.08.04 is set to 2: When the speed searches upward, it will accelerate by V/f curve.

Power

Input

08.05

Maximum Allowable

Power Loss Time

08.05

Maximum

Allowable Power

Output

Frequency

Speed Search

08.04=1

Baseblock Time

08.06

Speed

Synchronization

Detection

08.04=2

Baseblock Time

08.06

Output

Voltage

08.09

08.10

08.11

08.12

08.13

08.14

Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit

Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit






Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz

Unit: Hz


These parameters are used to set the frequencies that are inhibited to operate. This function can be used to prevent the resonance generated from the original frequency of the machines.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




It keeps the drive from running at the resonance frequency of machinery or load system or other inhibition frequency. There are three frequency areas can be set.

These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output. These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08.09

≥ Pr.08.10 ≥ Pr.08.11 ≥ Pr.08.12 ≥ Pr.08.13 ≥ Pr.08.14. When it is set to 0.0, the skip frequency is invalid.

The frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequency. At this moment, the output frequency (H) will be less than the lower limit of skip frequency.

When the drive accelerates/decelerates, the output frequency will pass the range of skip frequency.

Internal

Frequency

Command

08.09

08.10

08.11

08.12

08.13

08.14

frequency is dec reas ed frequency is increas ed

0

Sett ing f requenc y command

08.15

Auto Restart After Fault


Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.

Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.

When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08.07 Base

Block Time for Speed Search.

When the fault times exceeds Pr.08.15 setting, the drive will refuse to restart and the user needs to press “RESET” for continuous operation.





Related parameter: Pr.08.16 (Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault)

08.16

Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault

Settings 0.1 to 6000 sec

Unit: second


This parameter is used to set the auto reset time at restart after fault. After restarting for fault, if there is no fault for over Pr.08.16 setting from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to Pr.08.15 setting..

This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08.15.

For example: If Pr.08.15 is set to 10 and Pr.08.16 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10.

Related Pr.08.15(Auto Restart After Fault)

08.17

Automatic Energy-saving

Settings 0

1

Energy-saving operation disabled

Energy-saving operation enabled

Factory Setting: 0

When Pr.08.17 is set to 1, the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage.

During constant speed operation, it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the load. This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or near full-load during operation.

The max. energy saving is in the stable load output. At this moment, the output voltage is almost 70% of the rated voltage.

Output

Voltage

100%

70%

During auto-energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load.

The output voltage is maximally lowered to 70% of the normal output voltage

Output Frequency


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




08.18

Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)

Settings 0

1

2

3

AVR function enabled

AVR function disabled

AVR function disabled for deceleration

AVR function disabled for stop

Factory Setting: 0

The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V/200VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output.

AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum

Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). For instance, if Pr.01.02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC.

Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual

DC-bus voltage. The output voltage won’t be changed by DC bus voltage.

Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over current.

Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration, such as operated from high speed to low speed.

Setting 3: the drive will disable the AVR function at stop to accelerate the brake.

When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to

2 with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.

Related parameter: Pr.01.16(Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting))

08.19

Software Brake Level

(the Action Level of the Brake resistor)

Settings 115/230V series: 370.0 to 430.0V

460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V

Unit: V







This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration. Refer to appendix B for the information of the brake resistor.

This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models (VFD002E11A/21A/23A,

VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A and VFD022E23A/43A) without brake chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used.

08.20

Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability

Settings 0.0~5.0 Factory Setting: 0.0

In V/f control mode, the drift current may cause slight motor vibration in the slip compensation or torque compensation. It can be ignored if this slight vibration doesn’t affect the application.

The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will cause serious motor vibration. It is recommended to use this parameter(the recommended value is 2.0) to improve this situation greatly.

The drift current zone of the high-power motors is usually in the low frequency area.

It is recommended to set to more than 2.0.

08.21

OOB Sampling Time


08.22

Number of OOB Sampling Times

Settings 0.00 to 32

08.23

OOB Average Sampling Angle

Settings Read-only

Unit: second


Factory Setting: 20

Factory Setting: #.#

The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with PLC for washing machine.

When multi-function input terminal is enabled (MI=26), it will get Δθ value from the settings of

Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ value (Pr.08.23). When Δθ value is large, it means unbalanced load. At this moment, it needs to lower the frequency command by PLC or the host controller. On the other hand, it can be high-speed operation.

Related parameters: Pr.04.05(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)), 04.06(Multi-function Input

Terminal (MI4)), Pr.04.07(Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)) and Pr.04.08(Multi-function Input

Terminal (MI6))


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




08.24

DEB Function

Factory Setting: 0

08.25

DEB Return Time

Settings 0~250 sec

Unit: second

Factory Setting: 0

The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time. (for high-speed axis application)

Related Pr.08.04(Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection)

Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low voltage)/sudden heavy-load

DC BUS volt age

The level for DEB ret urn time

(Lv=+30V+ 58V)

The level for soft start relay t o be ON

(Lv+30)

Lv level it doesn't ne ed multi-function terminals

Soft start relay at pow er sid e

DEB function is activated

Output frequen cy

4-136

08.25

DEB ret urn time

NO TE

When Pr.08. 24 is set to 0, the AC moto r drive will be stopped and won't re-start at the powe r-on again.





Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss

DC BUS volt age

The level for DEB ret urn time

(Lv=+30V+ 58V)

The level for soft start relay to be ON

(Lv+30)

Lv level

Soft start relay at pow er sid e

DEB function is activated

Output freque ncy

08.25

DEB ret urn time

08.26

Speed Search during Start-up

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia. A motor with high inertia will take a long time to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a

PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the setting frequency.

When using this parameter with PG feedback control, this function will be enabled as Pr.13.00 and Pr.13.01 are set. It has no relation with Pr.00.10. Pr.08-04 and Pr.08-06 will be disabled when using this parameter with PG feedback control.

Please make sure Pr.13.00 to Pr.13.02 are set correctly. An incorrect setting may cause the motor to exceed its speed limit and permanent damage to the motor and machine can occur.

08.27

Speed Search Frequency during Start-up

Factory Setting: 0

1 Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr.01.00)

This parameter determines the start value of the speed search frequency.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Group 9: Communication Parameters

There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-45 near to the control terminals. The pins are defined below:

8 1

RS-485 (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

Serial interface

1: Reserved 2: EV

4: SG- 5: SG+ 6: Reserved

7: Reserved 8: Reserved

3: GND

The pins definition for VFD*E*C models, please refer to chapter E.1.2.

Each VFD-E AC motor drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09.00. The

RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.

09.00

Communication Address


If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each

AC motor drive must be different and unique.

09.01

Transmission Speed

Settings 0

1

2

3

Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second)

Baud rate 9600 bps

Baud rate 19200 bps

Baud rate 38400 bps

Factory Setting: 1

This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, etc.) and AC motor drive.

09.02

Transmission Fault Treatment

Settings 0

1

2

3

Warn and keep operating



No warning and keep operating

Factory Setting: 3

This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.





Setting 0: when transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running. The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal.

Setting 1: when transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time (Pr.01.10/01.12). It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting 2: When transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately. It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting 3: When transmission errors occur, it won’t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running.

See list of error messages below (see section 3.6 in Pr.09.04)

NOTE


09.03

Time-out Detection

Unit: second

Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0

If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.

09.04

Communication Protocol

Factory Setting: 0

3

4

1

2

5

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




8

9

6

7

10

11




Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>



1. Control by PC or PLC

A VFD-E can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote

Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09.04.

Code Description:

The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset. Therefore, there is at least 1 second delay time in master station.

ASCII mode:

Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:

64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).

Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’

ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H

Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H

RTU mode:

Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64

Hex.

2. Data Format

10-bit character frame (For ASCII):





( 7.N.2)

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4 5

7-bit character

10-bit character frame

( 7.E.1)

Start

bit

0

1 2

3 4 5

7-bit character


( 7.O.1)

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4 5

7-bit character


( 7.N.1)

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

5

7-bit character


( 7.E.2)

Start

bit

0

1 2

3 4 5

7-bit character


( 7.O.2)

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

7-bit character


11-bit character frame (For RTU):

5

6

Stop bit

Stop bit

6

Even parity

Stop bit

6

Odd parity

Stop bit

6

Stop bit

6

Even parity

Stop bit

Stop bit

6

Odd parity

Stop bit

Stop bit


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




( 8.N.2 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5 6 7

Stop bit

Stop bit

( 8.E.1 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5

6 7

Even parity

Stop bit

( 8.O.1 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5 6 7

Odd parity

Stop bit

( 8.N.1 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5 6 7

Stop bit

( 8.E.2 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5 6 7

Even parity

Stop bit

Stop bit

( 8.O.2 )

Start

bit

0 1 2 3 4

8-bit character


5 6 7

Odd parity

Stop bit

Stop bit

3. Protocol

3.1 Communication Data Frame:

ASCII mode:

STX

Address Hi

Address Lo

Function Hi

Function Lo

DATA (n-1) to

DATA 0

Start character ‘:’ (3AH)

Communication address:

8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes

Command code:

8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes

Contents of data:

Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes




LRC CHK Hi

LRC CHK Lo

END Hi

END Lo


LRC check sum:

8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes

End characters:

END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)

RTU mode:

START

Address

Function

DATA (n-1) to

DATA 0

A silent interval of more than 10 ms

Communication address: 8-bit address

Command code: 8-bit command

Contents of data: n

×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data)

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

CRC check sum:

16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters

END A silent interval of more than 10 ms

3.2 Address (Communication Address)

Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0, means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the master device.

00H: broadcast to all AC drives

01H: AC drive of address 01

0FH: AC drive of address 15

10H: AC drive of address 16

:

FEH: AC drive of address 254

For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):

ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H

RTU mode: Address=10H

3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)

The format of data characters depends on the function code.

03H: read data from register

06H: write single register

08H: loop detection


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




10H: write multiple registers

The available function codes and examples for VFD-E are described as follows:

(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.

Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.

ASCII mode:

Command message:

Address

Function

Starting data address

Number of data

(count by word)

LRC Check

END

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

Address

‘3’

Function

‘2’ Number of data

‘1’

(Count by byte)

‘2’ address

‘0’

‘0’

2102H

‘0’

Content of address

‘D’

2103H

‘7’

CR

LF

LRC Check

END

RTU mode:

Command message:

Response message:

Address 01H Address 01H

Function 03H Function 03H


Number of data

(count by word)

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

21H

02H

Number of data

(count by byte)

00H

02H

Content of address

2102H

6FH

F7H

Content of address

2103H

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.

04H

17H

70H

00H

00H

FEH

5CH

Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.

ASCII mode:

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘3’

‘0’

‘4’

‘1’

‘7’

‘7’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘7’

‘1’

CR

LF

Command message: Response message:

4-144

Address

Function

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘6’

Address

Function

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘6’




Command message:

Data address

Data content

LRC Check

END


Response message:

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

Data address

‘0’

‘1’

‘7’

‘7’

Data content

‘0’

‘7’

‘1’

CR

LF

LRC Check

END

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘0’

‘1’

‘7’

‘7’

‘0’

‘7’

‘1’

CR

LF

RTU mode:

Command message:



Data address

01H

00H

Data address

01H

00H

Data content

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

17H

70H

EEH

1FH

Data content

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

17H

70H

EEH

1FH

(3) 08H: loop detection

This command is used to detect if the communication between master device (PC or PLC) and AC motor drive is normal. The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device.

ASCII mode:


Address

Function

Data address

Data content

LRC Check

END

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘8’

‘0’

‘0’

Data address

‘0’

‘0’

‘1’

‘7’

‘7’

Data content

‘0’

‘7’

‘0’

CR

LF

Address

Function

LRC Check

END

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘8’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘1’

‘7’

‘7’

‘0’

‘7’

‘0’

CR

LF


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




RTU mode:

Command message:



Data address

00H

00H

Data address

00H

00H

Data content

17H

70H

Data content

17H

70H

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

EEH

1FH

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

EEH

1FH

(4) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)

Example: Set the multi-step speed,

Pr.05.00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05.01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.

ASCII Mode:


4-146

Address 1

Address 0

Function 1

Function 0


Number of data

(count by word)

Number of data

(count by byte)

‘0’

‘1’

‘1’

‘0’

‘0’

‘5’

‘0’

‘0’

Address 1

Address 0

Function 1

Function 0


‘0’

‘0’

Number of data

(count by word)

‘2’

‘0’

‘4’

‘1’

LRC Check

END

The first data content

‘3’

‘8’

The second data content

‘8’

‘0’

‘F’

‘A’

‘0’

LRC Check

‘9’

‘A’

END CR



‘0’

‘1’

‘1’

‘0’

‘0’

‘5’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘2’

‘E’

‘8’

CR

LF


Command message:

LF


Response message:

RTU mode:





00H

05H

00H

Number of data

(count by word)

Number of data

(count by byte)

00H’

02H

04

Number of data

(count by word)

CRC Check Low

00H

02H

41H

The first data content

The second data content

CRC Check Low

13H

88H

0FH

A0H

4DH

CRC Check High 04H

CRC Check High D9H

3.4 Check sum

ASCII mode:

LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.

For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.

STX ‘:’

Address 1

Address 0

‘0’

‘1’

Function 1

Function 0


‘0’

‘3’

‘0’

‘4’

‘0’

‘1’

Number of data

LRC Check 1

LRC Check 0

END 1

END 0

‘0’

‘0’

‘0’

‘1’

‘F’

‘6’

CR

LF

01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.

RTU mode:

Address 01H


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Function


03H

21H

Number of data

(count by word)

02H

00H

CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High

02H

6FH

F7H

CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:

Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.

Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.

Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.

Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value

A001H, then repeat step 3.

Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit byte will have been processed.

Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the

CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.

The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments:

Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer

Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer

The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.

Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){

int j;

unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;

while(length--){

reg_crc ^= *data++;

for(j=0;j<8;j++){

if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */

reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;



}else{

reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;

}

}

}

return reg_crc;

}



3.5 Address list

The contents of available addresses are shown as below:

Content Address Function

AC drive

Parameters GGnnH

GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for example, the address of Pr 04.01 is 0401H. Refer to chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can be read at one time.

Bit 0-1

Bit 2-3

00B: No function

01B: Stop

10B: Run

11B: Jog + Run

Reserved

Command

Write only

2000H

Bit 4-5

00B: No function

01B: FWD

10B: REV

11B: Change direction

Bit 6-7

Bit 8-15

00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel

01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel

Reserved

2001H Frequency command

Status monitor

Read only

2002H

2100H

Bit 0

Bit 1

1: EF (external fault) on

1: Reset

Bit 2-15 Reserved

Error code:

0: No error occurred

1: Over-current (oc)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Content Address


Function

4-150

3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)

4: Power Board Overheat (oH2)

(oL1)

(oL2)

8: External fault (EF)

9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA)

10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)

Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)

11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn)

12: Ground Fault (GFF)

13: Low voltage (Lv)

14: (Phase-Loss)

2100H 15: Base Block

16: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA)

17: Software protection enabled (codE)

18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (CF1.0)

19: Power Board CPU READ failure (CF2.0)

20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)

21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)

22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)

23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)

24: U-phase error (cF3.0)

25: V-phase error (cF3.1)

26: W-phase error (cF3.2)

27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)

28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)

29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)





Content Address


Function


32: ACI signal error (AErr)

34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)

35: PG feedback signal error (PGEr)

2101H

40: Communication time-out error of control board and power board (CP10)

41: dEb error

42: ACL (Abnormal Communication Loop)

Status of AC drive

00B: RUN LED is off, STOP LED is on (The AC motor Drive stops)

Bit 0-1

Bit 2

Bit 3-4

01B: RUN LED blinks, STOP LED is on (When

AC motor drive decelerates to stop)

10B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED blinks (When

AC motor drive is standby)

11B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED is off (When AC motor drive runs)

1: JOG command

00B: FWD LED is on, REV LED is off (When AC motor drive runs forward)

01B: FWD LED is on, REV LED blinks (When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward)

10B: FWD LED blinks, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse)

11B: FWD LED is off, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs reverse)

Bit 5-7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Reserved

1: Master frequency Controlled by communication interface

1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal

Bit 10

1: Operation command controlled by communication interface

Bit 11-15 Reserved


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Content Address Function

2102H Frequency command (F)

2103H (H)

2104H (AXXX.X)

2105H Reserved

2106H Reserved

2107H Reserved

2108H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)

2109H Output voltage (EXXX.X)

210AH

Display temperature of IGBT (

°C)

2116H

2117H

User defined (Low word)

User defined (High word)

Note: 2116H is number display of Pr.00.04. High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H. Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr.00.04.

3.6 Exception response:

The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device.

The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the

AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.

The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below.

In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.

Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:

ASCII mode: RTU mode:

Address Low

Address High

‘0’ Function 86H




Function Low

Function High

Exception code

LRC CHK Low

LRC CHK High

END 1

END 0

‘8’

‘6’ CRC CHK High

‘0’


CRC CHK Low C3H

A1H

‘2’

‘7’

‘7’

CR

LF

The explanation of exception codes:

Exception code

Explanation

01

Illegal function code:

The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive.

02

03

Illegal data address:

The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive.

Illegal data value:

The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive.

04

10

Slave device failure:

The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.

Communication time-out:

If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.

3.7 Communication program of PC:

The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus

ASCII mode on a PC in C language.

#include<stdio.h>

#include<dos.h>

#include<conio.h>

#include<process.h>

#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */

/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




#define THR 0x0000

#define RDR 0x0000

#define BRDL 0x0000

#define IER 0x0001

#define BRDH 0x0001

#define LCR 0x0003

#define MCR 0x0004

#define LSR 0x0005

#define MSR 0x0006 unsigned char rdat[60];

/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */ unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'}; void main(){ int i; outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */ outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */ outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));

/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */ outportb(PORT+BRDL,12); /* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/ outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00); outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH,

<7,O,1>=0AH, <8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */ for(i=0;i<=16;i++){ while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */ outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]); /* send data to THR */ } i=0; while(!kbhit()){ if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */ rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */

} } }

09.05

Reserved

09.06

Reserved

09.07

Response Delay Time

Settings 0 ~ 200 (400msec)

Unit: 2ms

Factory Setting: 1





This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following. 1 unit = 2 msec.

RS485 BUS

09.08

PC or PLC command

Handling time of AC drive

Max.: 6msec

Transmission Speed for USB Card

Response Delay Time

Pr.09.07

Response Message of AC Drive

Factory Setting: 2

1

2

3

4

Baud rate 9600 bps

Baud rate 19200 bps

Baud rate 38400 bps

Baud rate 57600 bps

This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card.

09.09

Communication Protocol for USB Card

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

9

10

11









Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>



09.10

Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card

Settings 0

1

2

3




No warning and keep operating


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Factory Setting: 1

Factory Setting: 0




This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors occurs.

Setting 0: when transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running. The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal.

Setting 1: when transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time (Pr.01.10/01.12). It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting 2: When transmission errors occur, it will display warning message “cEXX” on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately. It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting 3: When transmission errors occur, it won’t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running.

See list of error messages below (see section 3.6 in Pr.09.04)

NOTE


09.11

Time-out Detection for USB Card Unit: second


09.12

COM port for PLC Communication (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

Factory Setting: 0




Group 10: PID Control


A. Common applications for PID control

1. Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and perform accurate flow control.

2. Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and perform precise pressure control.

3. Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have excellent air volume regulation.

4. Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for comfortable temperature control.

5. Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave operation.

Pr.10.00 sets the PID setpoint source (target value). PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr.10.01 either 0~+10V voltage or 4-20mA current.

B. PID control loop:

Setpoint

+

-

drive ex ecute PID control output value

K p

(1

+

T i

1

×

S

+

T d

×

S)

IM

feedback s ignal sensor

K p

: Proportional gain(P)

C. Concept of PID control

T i

: Integral time(I)

T d

: Derivative control(D) : Operator

1. Proportional gain(P): the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there will always be a steady-state error.

2. Integral time(I): the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the steady-state error, an “integral part” needs to be added to the controller. The integral time decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by time even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is 0.

In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional gain control and integral time control.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




3. Differential control(D): the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input.

During elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can be used to suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0, the differential control should be 0. Proportional gain(P) + differential control(D) can be used to improve the system state during PID adjustment.

D. When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:

Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the setpoint of PID control. The pressure sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID setpoint and PID feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the output by using proportional gain(P), integral time(I) and differential time(D) to control the pump. It controls the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4-20mA signal corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.

VFD-E

R

S

T

no fuse breaker

(NFB)

R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)

E

U(T1)

V(T2)

W(T3)

E

water pump

IM

ACI/AVI

(4~20mA/0-10V)

feedback 4-20mA corresponds to

0-10 bar

DC

throttle pressure sensor

AVI

switch

ACI

1. Pr.00.04 is set to 5 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))

2. Pr.01.09 Acceleration Time will be set as required




3. Pr.01.10 Deceleration Time will be set as required

4. Pr.02.01=1 to operate from the digital keypad

5. Pr.10.00=1, the setpoint is controlled by the digital keypad


6. Pr.10.01=3(Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC))

7. Pr.10.01-10.17 will be set as required

7.1 When there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.10.02(Proportional Gain (P))

7.2 When there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.10.03(Integral Time (I))

7.3 When there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.10.04(Differential Time(D))

8. Refer to Pr.10.00-10.17 for PID parameters settings.

10.00

PID Set Point Selection

Factory Setting: 0

3

4

1

2

Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys

AVI 0 ~ +10VDC

ACI 4 ~ 20mA / AVI2 0 ~ +10VDC

PID set point (Pr.10.11)

10.01

Input Terminal for PID Feedback

Factory Setting: 0

Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2

(0 ~ +10VDC).

Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/

AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC).

Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz).

When Pr.10.00=2 or 3, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained from the

AVI or ACI/AVI2 external terminal (0 to +10V or 4-20mA) or from multi-step speed. When

Pr.10.00=1, the set point is obtained from the keypad.

When Pr.10.01=1 or 3 (Negative feedback): Error (Err) = setpoin(SP) – feedback(FB). When the feedback will be increased by the increasing output frequency, please use this setting.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




When Pr.10.01= to 0 or 2 (Positive feedback): Error (Err) =feedback(FB)- setpoint(SP) When the feedback will be decreased by the increasing output frequency, please use this setting.

Select input terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr.10.00 (Master Frequency).

Related parameters: Pr.00.04 Content of Multi-function Display (set to 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%)), Pr. 10.11(Source of PID Set point) and Pr.04.19(ACI/AVI2

Selection)

10.11

Source of PID Set point


Unit: Hz


This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr.10.00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz.

10.02

Proportional Gain (P)


It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.10.02, it may cause the system oscillation and instability.

It can be used to set the proportional gain to decide the responds speed. The larger value is set in Pr.10.02, the faster response it will get. The smaller value is set in Pr.10.02, the slower response it will get.

If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.

Related parameters: Pr.10.03(Integral Time (I)) and Pr.10.04(Differential Control (D))

10.03

Integral Time ( I ) Unit: second


The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.

This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the




Chapter 4 Parameters| integral time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.

When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.

When it is set to 0.0, the integral function is disabled.

Related Pr.10.05(Upper

10.04

Differential Control (D)


Unit: second


The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview the change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve system state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment time. However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference.

Please note that too large differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change.

Therefore, the differential control can’t be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD controller or PID controller.

This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change. The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system oscillation.

The differential controller acts for the change of error and can’t reduce the interference. It is not recommended to use this function in the serious interference.

10.05

Upper Bound for Integral Control

Unit: %


This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the

Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency

(Pr.01.00) x (Pr.10.05).

Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it may cause motor stall or machine damage.

Related parameter: Pr.01.00(Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax))


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




10.06

Primary Delay Filter Time


Unit: second


It is used to set the time that required for the low-pass filter of PID output. Increasing the setting, it may affect the drive’s response speed.

The frequency output of PID controller will filter after primary delay filter time. It can smooth the change of the frequency output. The longer primary delay filter time is set, the slower response time it will be.

The unsuitable primary delay filter time may cause system oscillation.

PID control can be used for speed, pressure and flow control. It needs to use with the relevant equipment of sensor feedback for PID control. Refer to the following for the closed-loop control diagram.

Freq .

Command

Setpoint

+

-

P

10.02

I

10.03

In teg ral g ain limit

10.05

+

+

+

O utput

Freq .

L imit

10.07

Digi tal filte r

10.06

Motor

D

10.04

Input Freq.

Gai n

10.10

PID feedba ck

10.01

Sensor

10.07

PID Output Frequency Limit

Settings 0 to 110 %

Unit: %


This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) X Pr.10.07 %.

This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr.01.07.

Related parameter: Pr.01.00(Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax))

10.08

PID Feedback Signal Detection Time

Settings 0.0 to d 3600 sec

Unit: second


This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning (see Pr.10.09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time.

If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.





If it doesn’t receive PID feedback signal over Pr.10.08 setting, the feedback signal fault will occur and please refer to Pr.10.09 for the fault treatment.

Related Pr.10.09(Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals)

10.09

Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID feedback error)

Settings

1

2

0 Warning and RAMP to stop

Warning and COAST to stop

Warning and keep operating

Factory Setting: 0

AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback) are abnormal according to Pr.10.16.

Setting Pr.10.09 to 0: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “FbE” on the digital keypad and the motor will stop to 0Hz by Pr.01.10/Pr.01.12 setting. It needs to clear “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting Pr.10.09 to 1: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “FbE” on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop. It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message.

Setting Pr.10.09 to 2: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “FbE” on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running. The warning message can be cleared after the feedback signal is normal.

Related parameters” Pr.10.00(PID Set Point Selection), Pr.10.01(Input Terminal for PID

Feedback), Pr.10.12(PID Offset Level) and Pr.10.13(Detection Time of PID Offset)

NOTE


10.10

Gain Over the PID Detection Value


This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




This parameter will affect Pr.00.04(setting 5) directly. That is Pr.00.04(setting 5) Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%)= PID detection value X Gain Over the PID Detection

Value.

Related parameters: Pr.00.04(Content of Multi-function Display) and Pr.10.01(Input Terminal for PID Feedback)

10.12

PID Offset Level


Unit: %


This parameter is used to set max. allowable value of PID error.

10.13

Detection Time of PID Offset


Unit: second


This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback.

When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr.10.12 for a time exceeding the setting of

Pr.10.13, PID feedback signal fault occurs and operates by the treatment set in Pr.10.09.

Related parameters: Pr.10.00(PID Set Point Selection), Pr.10.01(Input Terminal for PID

Feedback), Pr.10.09(Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals) and Pr.10.12(PID

Offset Level)

10.17

Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection

Settings 0

1

By PID control

By Minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)

Factory Setting: 0

This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID.

The output of the AC motor drive will refer to this parameter setting. When this parameter is set to 0, the output frequency will output by the calculation of PID. When this parameter is set to 1 and Pr.01.08 is not set to 0, the output frequency=Pr.01.08 setting. Otherwise, the output frequency=Pr.01.05 setting.

Related parameters: Pr.01.05(Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)) and

Pr.01.08(Output Frequency Lower Limit)

10.14

Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time

Settings 0.0 to 6550 sec

Unit: second






If PID frequency is less than the sleep frequency when the drive starts running, the drive will be in sleep mode immediately and won’t limit by this parameter.

Related parameters: Pr.10.15(Sleep Frequency) and Pr.10.16(Wakeup Frequency)

10.15

Sleep Frequency


Unit: Hz


This parameter set the frequency for the AC motor drive to be in sleep mode.

The AC motor drive will stop outputting after being sleep mode, but PID controller keep operating.

10.16

Wakeup Frequency


Unit: Hz


This parameter is used to set the wakeup frequency to restart the AC motor drive after sleep mode.

The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency.

When the actual output frequency

≤

Pr.10.15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode and the motor will decelerate to stop by

Pr.01.10/01.12 setting.

When the actual frequency command > Pr.10.16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will restart.

When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID.

When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05 minimum frequency following the V/f curve.

Fre quen cy

10 .16

W ake up

Fre quen cy

10 .15

Sleep

Fre quen cy

01 .05

Min. Output

Fre quen cy frequ ency calcu la ted by PID

The limit o f de cel. time

10 .14 Slee p/w ak e up detection time


CALL NOW 800-985-6929 ou tpu t frequ ency

The limit o f acce l. time

Time


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Fcmd=0

Fout = 0

Fmin lower bound of frequency

Fmin<Fsleep< lower bound of frequency


Fsleep

When Pr. 01.05min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency (H) ≦ Pr.01.08 lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency (H) < Pr.10.15 sleep frequency and time > Pr.10.14 detection time), frequency will be 0 (in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, output frequency(H) = Pr.01.08 lower bound frequency.

NOTE

The common adjustments of PID control are shown as follows:

Example 1: how to have stable control as soon as possible?

Please shorten Pr.10.03 (Integral Time (I)) setting and increase Pr,10.04(Differential Control (D)) setting.

Response before adjustment after adjustment

Time

Example 2: How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with long cycle?

If it is oscillation when the wave cycle is longer than integral time, it needs to increase Pr.10.03 setting to suppress the oscillation.



R esp ons e

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

be for e adjus tme nt



afte r adjus tme nt

Time

Example 3: How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with short cycle?

When the cycle of oscillation is short and almost equal Differential time setting, it needs to shorten the differential time setting to suppress the oscillation. If Differential time(I) = 0.0, it can not suppress the oscillation. Please reduce Pr.10.02 setting or increase Pr.10.06 setting.

R esp onse be for e adjus tm ent afte r adjus tme nt

Time


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card

Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11 parameters. See Appendix B for details.

11.00

Multi-function Output Terminal MO2/RA2

11.01


11.02


11.03


11.04


11.05




0

No Function

1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”.

2

5

6

7

Master Frequency

Attained

Baseblock (B.B.)

Indication

Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency setting.

Active when Command Frequency is lower than the

Minimum Output Frequency.

Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03

Detection

~ Pr.06.05)

Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multifunction input (setting 09).

Low-Voltage Indication

Operation Mode

Indication

Active when low voltage (Lv) is detected.

Active when operation command is controlled by external terminal.

Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3,

HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).




Settings

9

Function

Desired Frequency

Attained

10

11

12

13

14


Description

Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03.02) is attained.


Attained

Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value.


Attained

Over Voltage Stall supervision

Over Current Stall supervision

Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value.

Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating

Active when the Over Current Stall function operating

Heat Sink Overheat

Warning

When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off the drive. When it is higher than 85oC (185oF), it will be

ON.

Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level 15

16

17

PID supervision

Forward command

Active when the PID function is operating

Active when the direction command is FWD

19

20

21

Zero Speed Output

Signal

Active when the direction command is REV

Active unless there is an output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

Communication Warning

(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE,

SAvE)

Active when there is a Communication Warning

Brake Control (Desired

Frequency Attained)

Active when output frequency

≥Pr.03.14. Deactivated when output frequency

≤Pr.03.15 after STOP command.

11.06

11.07

11.08

11.09






CALL NOW 800-985-6929




11.10


11.11



Refer to the table below Pr.04.08 for setting the multifunction input terminals.

Set the corresponding parameter according to the terminal labeled on the extension card.






Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters. See Appendix B for details.

12.00

AI1 Function Selection

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

3

Source of the 1st frequency

Source of the 2nd frequency

PID Set Point (PID enable)

12.01

AI1 Analog Signal Mode

Settings 0

1

ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)

AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)

Factory Setting: 1

Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.

AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2

ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2

12.02

Min. AVI3 Input Voltage


12.03

Min. AVI3 Scale Percentage


12.04

Max. AVI3 Input Voltage



CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: V



CALL NOW 800-985-6929


12.05

Max. AVI3 Scale Percentage


12.06

Min. ACI2 Input Current


12.07

Min. ACI2 Scale Percentage


12.08

Max. ACI2 Input Current


12.09

Max. ACI2 Scale Percentage


12.10

AI2 Function Selection http://www.automatedpt.com

Unit: %


Unit: mA


Unit: %


Unit: mA


Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

1

2

3



PID Set Point (PID enable)

12.11

AI2 Analog Signal Mode

Settings 0

1

ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)

AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)

Factory Setting: 1

Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.







12.12

Min. AVI4 Input Voltage


12.13

Min. AVI4 Scale Percentage


12.14

Max. AVI4 Input Voltage


12.15

Max. AVI4 Scale Percentage


12.16

Min. ACI3 Input Current


12.17

Min. ACI3 Scale Percentage


12.18

Max. ACI3 Input Current


12.19

Max. ACI3 Scale Percentage



CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: V


Unit: %


Unit: mA


Unit: %


Unit: mA


Unit: %



CALL NOW 800-985-6929


12.20

AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory Setting: 0

1

2

ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)


Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.



12.21

AO1 Analog Output Signal

Factory Setting: 0

1 Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)

This parameter is used to choose analog frequency (0-+10Vdc) or analog current (4-20mA) to correspond to the AC motor drive’s output frequency or current.

12.22

AO1 Analog Output Gain

Settings 1 to 200%

Unit: %


This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range.

When Pr.12.21 is set to 0, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output frequency. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the max. output frequency (Pr.01.00) setting corresponds to the AFM output (+10VDC or 20mA)

When Pr.12.21 is set to 1, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output current. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the 2.5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output

(+10VDC or 20mA)





NOTE

If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V, refer to following formula to set Pr.12.22:

Pr.12.22 = [(full scale voltage)/10]*100%.

Example: When using voltmeter with full scale (5V), Pr.12.22 should be set to 5/10*100%=50%. If

Pr.12.21 is set to 0, the output voltage will correspond to the max. output frequency.

12.23

AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode

Factory Setting: 0

1

2



Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.



12.24

AO2 Analog Output Signal

1 Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)

12.25

AO2 Analog Output Gain

Settings 1 to 200%

Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the AO1.

12.26

AUI Analog Input Selection

1

2

0 function




CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


12.27

AUI Analog Input Bias


12.28

AUI Bias Polarity http://www.automatedpt.com

Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

12.29

AUI Analog Gain

Settings 1 to 200%

12.30

AUI Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable

Settings 0

1

2

No AUI Negative Bias Command

Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled

Negative Bias: REV Motion Disabled

12.31

AUI Analog Input Delay

Settings 0 to 9999

Unit: %


Factory Setting: 0

Unit: 2ms

Factory Setting: 50

In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.

Pr.12-26 to Pr.12-31 can be used to set the frequency command by adjusting analog input voltage -10V to +10V. Refer to Pr.04-00 to 04-03 for details.






Pulse generator card (PG card) is mainly applied in the detection components of speed control or position control. It usually makes a closed-loop speed control system with encoder. The AC motor drive is used with encoder and PG card to have a complete speed control and position detection system.

Please make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters. See Appendix B for details.

13.00

PG Input

Factory Setting: 0

There are two outputs, 1-phase and 2-phase output, for the encoder output. For the 1-phase output, the encoder output is a group of pulse signal. For the 2-phase output, the encoder can output A and B pulse signals with 90 o

phase difference. The encoder is defined by the timing of A and B pulses as the following figure. It can not only measure the speed but distinguish motor rotation direction by A and B pulse signals.

PG card receives A and B pulses from encoder output and sends this feedback signal to the

AC motor drive for speed or position control.

Setting 0: disable PG function.

Setting 1: for speed/position control but can’t distinguish motor rotation direction.

Setting 2: both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction. A phase leads B phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is forward running.

Setting 3: both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction. B phase leads A phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is reverse running.

Related parameter: Pr.13.01(PG Pulse Range)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




A phas e leads B phase

A phas e

FWD

CCW

B phas e

13.00= 2

When receiving a forward command, motor will rotate in countercloc kwise direction (see from output s ide).

REV

CW

B phas e leads A phase

A phas e

B phas e

13.00= 3

When receiving a rev erse command, motor wil l rotate i n cloc kwise direction (see from output s ide).

PULSE

GE NERATOR

CW

A phas e

B phas e

When enc oder rotates in cl oc kwise di rection (see from input side).

At this moment, A phase leads B phase.

13.01

PG Pulse Range


A Pulse Generator (PG) is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.

This parameter setting is the resolution of encoder. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be more precise.

13.02


Settings 2 to 10

Unit: 1

Factory Setting: 4

The pole number should be even (can’t be odd).

13.03

Proportional Gain (P)


Unit: 0.01


This parameter is used to set the gain (P) when using PG for the closed-loop speed control.

The proportional gain is mainly used to eliminate the error. The large proportional gain(P) will get the faster response to decrease the error. Too large proportional gain will cause large overshoot and oscillation and decrease the stable.





This parameter can be used to set the proportional gain (P) to decide the response speed.

With large proportional gain, it will get faster response. Too large proportional gain may cause system oscillation. With small proportional gain, it will get slower response.

13.04

Integral Gain ( I )


Unit: 0.01


The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.

This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.

When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.

When it is set to 0.0, the integral function is disabled.

13.05

Speed Control Output Frequency Limit


Unit: Hz


This parameter is used to limit the max. output frequency.

From the following PG speed diagram, output frequency (H) = frequency command (F) + speed detection value via PG feedback. With the speed change of motor load, the speed change will be sent to drive via PG card to change the output frequency. So this parameter can be used to decrease the speed change of motor load.

13.06

Speed Feedback Display Filter

Settings 0 to 9999 (*2ms)

Unit: 2ms


When Pr.0.04 is set to 14, its display will be updated regularly. This update time is set by

Pr.13.06.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




With the large setting in Pr.13.06, it can slow the response speed to prevent the blinking of digital number on the digital keypad. Too large setting may cause the delay of RPM value via

PG card.

Related parameter: Pr.00.04(Content of Multi-function Display)

13.09

Speed Feedback Filter

Settings 0 to 9999 (*2ms)

Unit: 2ms

Factory Setting: 16

This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card. Too large setting may cause slow feedback response.

Frequency command

+

Speed detection

-

P

13.03

+

+

Speed control output frequency limit

13.05

Output frequency upper limit

01.07

output frequency

(H)

Motor

I

13.04

Speed feedback filter

13.09

PG type, pulse range and motor pole number

13.00, 13.01, 13.02

PG

PG feedback speed control

13.07

Time for Feedback Signal Fault


Unit: second


This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning (see Pr.13.08) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time.

If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.

Related Pr.13.08(Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault)




13.08

Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault

Settings 0

1

2





Factory Setting: 1

AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) feedback) are abnormal.

Setting Pr.13.08 to 0: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “PGEr” on the digital keypad and the stop to 0Hz by Pr.01.10/Pr.01.12 setting.

Setting Pr.13.08 to 1: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “PGEr” on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop.

Setting Pr.13.08 to 2: When the feedback signal fault occurs, it will display “PGEr” on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running.

It needs to press “RESET” to clear the warning message “PGEr” displayed on the keypad.

NOTE


13.10

Source of the High-speed Counter (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

0 card

Factory Display: 0 (Read only)

This parameter reads the high-speed counter of the drive to use on PG card or PLC.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


4.4 Different Parameters for VFD*E*C Models


The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation

Software version for VFD*E*C is power board: V1.00 and control board: V2.00.

: The parameter can be set during operation.

Group 0 User Parameters


0: Parameter can be read/written

1: All parameters are read only

Factory

Setting

Customer

6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models)

9: All parameters are reset to factory settings

(50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on

Pr.00.12)

10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)

0

00.03

Start-up Display

Selection

0: Display the frequency command value

(Fxxx)

1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)


(Uxxx)

3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04

4: FWD/REV command

5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)



(Uxxx)

1: Display the counter value (c)

0

0

2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for

VFD*E*C models)

3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u)

4: Display output voltage (E)






Factory

Setting

Customer

5: Display PID analog feedback signal value

(b) (%)

6: Output power factor angle (n)

7: Display output power (P)

8: Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current (t)

9: Display AVI (I) (V)

10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V)

11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (

°C)

12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)

13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)

14: Display PG speed in RPM (G)

15: Display motor number (M)

Group 1 Basic Parameters


01.11 Accel Time 2

01.12 Decel Time 2

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec

Group 2 Operation Method Parameters


02.00

Source of First

Master Frequency

Command

Settings




AVI2




Factory

Setting

Customer

1.0

1.0

Factory

Setting

Customer

5


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





0: Digital keypad

1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

Factory

Setting

Customer

2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

02.01

Source of First

Operation

Command


Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.


Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.

5

02.09

Source of Second

Frequency

Command

5: CANopen communication. Keypad

STOP/RESET disabled.




AVI2




0

02.16

02.17

Display the Master

Freq Command

Source

Display the

Operation

Command Source

Read Only

Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00)

Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09)


Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for

VFD*E*C models)

Read Only

Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad

Bit1=1: by RS485 communication

Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode


Bit5=1: by CANopen communication

##

##

Group 3 Output Function Parameters


03.09 Reserved

03.10 Reserved

Settings

Factory

Setting

Customer




Group 4 Input Function Parameters



04.05 Multi-function

Terminal (MI3)

Input

Terminal (MI5)

8: Jog Operation

Input

Terminal (MI6)

13: Counter reset

Settings



Input

Terminal (MI4)


5: External reset







16: Output shutoff stop



19: Operation command selection(keypad)


(communication)

21: FWD/REV command







3

23

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

2


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





04.24 Reserved

04.25 Reserved

Group 7 Motor Parameters


07.08

Torque

Compensation Time

Constant

0.01 ~10.00 Sec

Group 9 Communication Parameters

Parameter

09.12~

09.19

Explanation

Reserved

09.20

09.21

09.22

Settings

CANopen

Communication

Address

0: disable

1: 1 to 127

CANbus Baud Rate

Gain of CANbus

Frequency

0: 1M

1: 500K

2: 250K

3: 125K

4: 100K

5: 50K

0.00~2.00 bit 0 : CANopen Guarding Time out bit 1 : CANopen Heartbeat Time out bit 2 : CANopen SYNC Time out

Warning bit 3 : CANopen SDO Time out bit 4 : CANopen SDO buffer overflow bit 5 : CANbus Off bit 6 : Error protocol of CANopen bit 7 : CANopen boot up fault http://www.automatedpt.com

Factory

Setting

Customer

Factory

Setting

Customer

0.30

Factory

Setting

Customer

1

0

1.00

Readonly





0: Disable (By Delta rule)

1: Enable (By DS402)


Factory

Setting

Customer

1

Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card


11.06


Terminal (MI7)

0: No function




11.07


Terminal (MI8)


5: External reset

6: Accel/Decel inhibit


11.08


Terminal (MI9)

8: Jog Operation

9: External base block

11.09


Terminal (MI10)




13: Counter reset

11.10


Terminal (MI11)



Input

Terminal (MI12)



19: Operation command selection (keypad)


(communication)

21: FWD/REV command



0

0

0

0

Factory

Setting

Customer

0

0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929







Factory

Setting

Customer






Settings Parameter Explanation

13.10 Reserved

Factory

Setting

Customer




This page intentionally left blank



CALL NOW 800-985-6929





Chapter 5 Troubleshooting

5.1 Over Current (OC)

ocA

Over-current during acceleration ocd

Over-current during deceleration

OC

Over current

Yes

Remove short circuit or ground fault

Reduce the load or increase the power of AC motor drive

Yes

No Reduce torque compensation

Yes

No

Suitable torque compensation

Yes

Check if there is any grounding short circuits and between the U, V, W and motor

No

No No

No

Check if load is too large

No

No

Reduce torque

compensation

No

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

Check if acceleration time is too short by load inertia.

Yes

No

Check if deceleration time is too short by load inertia.

Yes

No

Has load changed suddenly?

Yes

Yes

Increase accel/decel

time

Can acceleration

time be made longer?

Yes Can deceleration

time be made longer?

No No

Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive


Check braking method. Please contact DELTA


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 5

Troubleshooting|

5.2 Ground Fault

GFF

Ground fault

5.3 Over Voltage (OV)

Is output circuit(cable or motor) of AC motor drive grounded?

Yes

No

Remove ground fault

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

Over voltage

Reduce voltage to be within spec.

No

Is voltage within specification

Yes

Has over-voltage occurred without load

No

Yes

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact

DELTA.

No

When OV occurs, check if the voltage of DC BUS is greater than protection value

Yes

Yes

No Dose OV occur when sudden acceleration stops

Yes

Increase deceleration time

No

Yes

Reduce moment of inertia

Increase acceleration time

No

Yes

Increase setting time

No

Reduce moment of load inertia

No

Need to consider using brake unit or

DC brake

No

Use brake unit or DC brake

Yes

Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.



5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)

Low voltage


Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

Is input power cor rect? O r power cut, including momentary power loss

Yes

No

Restart after r eset

Check if there i s any malfunction power s upply c ircuit

Change defec tiv e component and chec k c onnection

No

Check if voltage is within speci fic ati on

Yes

No

Check if there i s heavy load with high s tar t cur rent in the same power sy stem

No

Yes

Make nec essary cor rections, such as change power supply sy stem for requirement

No

Suitable power transformer capacity

Yes

Check if Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is O N

No

Yes

Check if voltage between +/B1 and - is greater than

200VDC (for 115V/230V models)

400VDC (for 460V models)

No

Yes

Contr ol c ircuit has malfunction or misoper ation due to noise. P leas e contact DELTA.

Maybe AC motor drive has m al function.

Please contact DELTA.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Chapter 5


5.5 Over Heat (OH)

AC motor drive ov erheats


Heat sink overheats

Chec k if temperature of heat sink is greater than 90

O

C

Yes

Yes

Is load too large

No

No

Temperature detection malfunctions.

Please c ontact D ELTA.

No

Reduce load

Change cooling f an

If cooling fan functions normally

Yes

Yes

Chec k if cooling f an is jammed

No

Chec k if surrounding temperature is within specification

No

Adjust surrounding temperature to specification

5.6 Overload

OL

OL1/ OL2

Yes

Remove obstruct ion


DELTA.

Check for correct settings at

Pr. 06-06 and 06-07

Yes

Is load too large

No

Yes

No


Modify setting

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise.





5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal

Abnormal display or no display

Yes

Cycle power to AC motor drive

Display normal?

Yes

No

AC motor drive works normally

Fix connector and eliminate noise

No

Check if all connectors are connect correctly and no noise is present

Yes

AC motor drive has malfunction.


5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)

Phase loss

Check wiring at R, S and T terminals

Yes

No

Check if the screws of terminals are tightened

Yes

Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced

No

No

Yes

Correct wiring

Tighten all screws

Please check the wiring and power system for abnormal power



CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 5


5.9 Motor cannot Run

Motor cannot run

Reset after clearing fault and then RUN

Check

KPE-LE02 for

normal display

Yes

No

Check if non-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON

Yes

Yes

Check if there is any fault code displayed

Check if input voltage is normal

No

No Yes

No

Set them to ON

Check if any faults occur, such as

Lv, PHL or disconnection

It can run when no faults occur

Input "RUN"

command

by keypad

Yes

No


Press RUN key to check if it can run

Press UP key to set frequency

Press UP to check if motor can run

Yes

No

Modify frequency setting

No

Check if input FWD or REV command

No

Check if the wiring of terminal FWD and between

REV-DCM is correct

Yes

No

Set frequency or not

No

No

Correct connection

Yes if upper bound freq. and setting freq. is lower than the min.

output freq.

No

No

Yes

Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi-step speed are correct

Change switch or relay

Yes

Change defective potentiometer and relay

Motor has malfunction

No

If load is too large

Yes

Check if the setting

of torque

compensation

is correct

No

Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U, V and W

Yes

Yes

Yes

Check if motor

connection

is correct

No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.

No


Connect correctly

Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.

For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.

Increase the setting of torque compensation





5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed

For VFD*E*C models, no PLC function is supported. Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC parts.

Motor can run but cannot change speed

Modify the setting

Yes

Yes

If the execution time is too long

No

Yes

If finished with executing PLC program

No

Yes

Check if the PLC program is correct

No

Yes

Check if the setting of the max. frequency is too low

No

Check to see if frequency is out of range (upper/lower) boundaries

No

No

Yes

If the PLC program is executed

Yes

Modify the setting

Press UP/DOWN key to see if speed has any change

Yes

Check if the wiring between

MI1~MI6 to DCM is correct

If there is any change of the signal that sets frequency (0-10V and

4-20mA)

No

Yes

No

No

Check if the wiring of external terminal is correct

Yes

Check if frequency for each step is different

No

Correct

wiring

Yes

Change defective potentiometer

No

Yes

Check if accel./decel. time is set correctly

Yes

Please set suitable accel./decel. time by load inertia

Change frequencysetting



CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Chapter 5


5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration


Motor stalls during acceleration

Check if acceleration time is too short

Yes

No

Check if the inertia of the motor and load is too high

No

Yes

Thicken or shorten the wiring between the motor or AC motor drive

Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive

Yes

Check for low voltage at input

Yes

No

Check if the load torque is too high

No

Check if the torque compensation is suitable

Yes

Increase setting time

Yes

Use special motor?

No



DELTA

No

Increase torque compensation

5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected

Motor does not run as expected

Check Pr. 01-01 thru Pr. 01-06 and torque compensation settings

Yes

No

Run in low speed continuously

Yes

No

Is load too large

Yes

No

Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06 and lower torque compensation

Please use specific motor


Check if output voltage of U, V, W

is balanced

Yes

No

Motor has malfunction






5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise

Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction. It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive. But this has its limits. Therefore, solving it from the outside as follows will be the best.

1. Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges.

2. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring.

3. Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length.

4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently, i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment.

5. Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit.

In short, solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of “no product”(disconnect disturbing equipment),

“no spread”(limit emission for disturbing equipment) and “no receive”(enhance immunity).

5.14 Environmental Condition

Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental conditions. Here are some remedial measures if necessary.

1. To prevent vibration, the use of anti-vibration dampers is the last choice. Vibrations must be within the specification. Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive.

2. Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location, free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts. Poor insulation in a humid location can cause shortcircuits. If necessary, install the AC motor drive in a dust-proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations, use a completely sealed enclosure.

3. The ambient temperature should be within the specification. Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary. In addition, the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures, making cabinet heating necessary.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 5


4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.

Use an air conditioner and/or exsiccator.

5.15 Affecting Other Machines

An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons. Some solutions are:

High Harmonics at Power Side

High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by:

1. Separate the power system: use a transformer for AC motor drive.

2. Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive.

3. If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics. serial reactor phase lead capacitor

Motor Temperature Rises

When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan, the cooling will be bad at low speeds, causing the motor to overheat. Besides, high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses. The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range.

1. Use a motor with independent ventilation (forced external cooling) or increase the motor rated power.

2. Use a special inverter duty motor.

3. Do NOT run at low speeds for long time.




Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance

6.1 Fault Code Information

The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.

The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.

NOTE

Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal.

6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions

Fault

Name

Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions

Over current

Abnormal increase in current.

1. Check if motor power corresponds with the

AC motor drive output power.

2. Check the wiring connections to U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3 for possible short circuits.

3. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits, also to ground.

4. Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor. the

6. Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor.

7. If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a shortcircuit is removed and the other points above are checked, it should be sent back to manufacturer.

Over voltage

The DC bus voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value.

1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range.

2. Check for possible voltage transients.

3. DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration. Either increase the

Decel. Time or add an optional brake resistor

(and brake unit).

4. Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault

Name

Fault Descriptions

Overheating

Heat sink temperature too high

Low voltage

The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value.

Overload

The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current.

NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds.

1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.

2. Reduce torque compensation setting in

Pr.07.02.

3. Use the next higher power AC motor drive model.

Corrective Actions

1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range.

2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed.

3. Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins.

4. Check the fan and clean it.

5. Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation. (See chapter 1)

1. Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range.

2. Check for abnormal load in motor.

3. Check for correct wiring of input power to R-S-

T (for 3-phase models) without phase loss.

Overload 1

Internal electronic overload trip

1. Check for possible motor overload.

2. Check thermal overload setting.

3. Use a higher power motor.

4. Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07.00.

Overload 2

Motor overload.

1. Reduce the motor load.

2. Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an appropriate setting (Pr.06.03 to Pr.06.05).

CC (current clamp)

OV hardware error

GFF hardware error

OC hardware error

Return to the factory.

External Base Block.

(Refer to Pr. 08.07)

1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active, the AC motor drive output will be turned off.

2. Deactivate external input terminal (B.B) to operate the AC motor drive again.




Fault

Name


Over-current during acceleration

Over-current during deceleration

Over-current during

constant speed operation

External Fault

Internal EEPROM can not be programmed.

Internal EEPROM can not be programmed.

Internal EEPROM can not be read.

Internal EEPROM can not be read.



1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines.

2. Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr.07.02.

3. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the

Acceleration Time.

4. AC motor drive output power is too small:

Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model.

1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line.

2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the

Deceleration Time.


Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model.

1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line.

2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for possible motor stall.


Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. multi-function are set to external fault, the AC motor drive stops output U, V and W.

2. Give RESET command after fault has been cleared.



1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting.

2. Return to the factory.



U-phase error

V-phase error

W-phase error

OV or LV

Temperature sensor error



CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Fault

Name


Ground fault

Auto accel/decel failure


When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC motor drive power module may be damaged.

NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection, not for protection of the user.

1. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged.

2. Check for possible poor insulation at the output line.

1. Check if the motor is suitable for operation by

AC motor drive.

2. Check regenerative energy is too large.

3. Load may have changed suddenly.

Communication Error

1. Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins.

2. Check if the communication protocol, address, transmission speed, etc. are properly set.

3. Use the correct checksum calculation.

4. Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information.

Software protection failure


Analog signal error

Check the wiring of ACI

PID feedback signal error

Phase Loss

Auto Tuning Error

Communication time-out error on the control board or power board

Motor overheat protection

AVI/ACI wiring.

2. Check possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time (Pr.10.08)

Check input phase wiring for loose contacts.

1. Check cabling between drive and motor again



1. Check if the motor is overheat

2. Check Pr.07.12 to Pr.07.17 settings

PG signal error

1. Check the wiring of PG card

2. Try another PG card

Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus

CANopen Guarding Time out

（

Only for VFDxxxExxC）




Fault

Name


CANopen Heartbeat Time out

（ Only for VFDxxxExxC）



Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus

CANopen SYNC Time out

（ Only for VFDxxxExxC）

Check if CANopen synchronous message is abnormal

Check if command channels are full

CANopen SDO Time out

（

Only for VFDxxxExxC）

CANopen SDO buffer overflow（Only for

VFDxxxExxC）

1. Too short time between commands, please check SDO message sent from the master

CAN bus off（Only for

VFDxxxExxC）

CAN Boot up fault（Only for

VFDxxxExxC）

1. Check if it connects to terminal resistor

2. Check if the signal is abnormal

3. Check if the master is connected

1. Check if the master is connected

2. Reset

Check if the communication protocol is correct

Error communication protocol of CANopen （Only for

VFDxxxExxC）

1. Set Pr.08-24 to 0

2. Check if the input power is stable

It will be displayed during deceleration when Pr.08-24 is not set to 0 and unexpected power off occurs, such as momentary power loss.

Abnormal Communication

Loop

1. Check if the communication wiring is correct

2. Return to the factory


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




6.1.2 Reset

There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:

1. Press key on keypad.

2. Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 05) and then set to be

ON.

NOTE

Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation.

6.2 Maintenance and Inspections

Modern AC motor drives are based on solid-state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check-up of the AC motor drive regularly.

Daily Inspection:

Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:

1. Whether the motors are operating as expected.

2. Whether the installation environment is abnormal.

3. Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.

4. Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.

5. Whether the motors are overheating during operation.

6. Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.

Periodic Inspection:

Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between ~ . It should be less than 25VDC.





DANGER!

2. Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are allowed.

3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.

4. Prevent static electricity.

Periodical Maintenance

Ambient environment

Check Items Methods and Criterion

Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

Check the ambient temperature, humidity, vibration and see if there are any dust, gas, oil or water drops

Check if there are any dangerous objects in the environment

Voltage

Visual inspection and measurement with equipment with standard specification

Visual inspection

{

{


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct

Measure with multimeter with standard specification

{


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Keypad


Is the display clear for reading?

Visual inspection

Any missing characters?

Mechanical parts

Check Items

Visual inspection

Methods and Criterion


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

{

{

If there is any abnormal sound or vibration

If there are any loose screws

If any part is deformed or damaged

If there is any color change by overheating

Visual and aural inspection

Tighten the screws

Visual inspection

Visual inspection

Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

{

{

{

{

{

Main circuit


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

{

If there are any loose or missing screws

If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked, damaged or with changed color change due to overheating or ageing

Tighten or replace the screw

Visual inspection

NOTE: Please ignore the color change of copper plate

{

{





Terminals and wiring of main circuit


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due to overheat

Visual inspection

If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has changed

Visual inspection

If there is any damage Visual inspection

DC capacity of main circuit

{

{

{


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there is any leakage of liquid, change of color, cracks or deformation

Measure static capacity when required

Resistor of main circuit

Visual inspection

Static capacity

≥

initial value X 0.85

{

{


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to overheating

Visual inspection, smell {

If there is any disconnection

Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring between +/B1 ~ -

Resistor value should be within

±

10%

{


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Transformer and reactor of main circuit



Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar smell

Visual, aural inspection and smell

Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit

{


If there are any loose screws

Visual and aural inspection. Tighten screw if necessary.

Visual inspection If the contact works correctly

Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit

Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

{

{


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there are any loose screws and connectors

If there is any peculiar smell and color change

If there is any crack, damage, deformation or corrosion

If there is any leaked liquid or deformation in capacitors

Tighten the screws and press the connectors firmly in place.

Visual inspection and smell

Visual inspection

Visual inspection

{

{

{

{





Cooling fan of cooling system


Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there is any abnormal sound or vibration

If there is any loose screw

Visual, aural inspection and turn the fan with hand (turn off the power before operation) to see if it rotates smoothly

Tighten the screw

If there is any change of color due to overheating

Ventilation channel of cooling system

Change fan


{

{

{

Maintenance

Period

Daily

Half

Year

One

Year

If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air intake or air outlet

Visual inspection {


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929






Appendix A Specifications

There are 115V, 230V and 460V models in the VFD-E series. For 115V models, it is 1-phase models. For 0.25 to 3HP of the 230V models, there are 1-phase/3-phase models. Refer to following specifications for details.

Voltage Class

Model Number VFD-XXXE

Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)

Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)

Rated Output Capacity (kVA)

Rated Output Current (A)

Maximum Output Voltage (V)

Output Frequency (Hz)

Carrier Frequency (kHz)

Rated Input Current (A)

115V Class

002

0.2

004

0.4

007

0.75

0.25 0.5 1.0

0.6

1.6

1.0

2.5

3-Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage

1.6

4.2

0.1~600 Hz

1-15

Single-phase

6 9 18

Rated Voltage/Frequency Single phase, 100-120V, 50/60Hz

Voltage Tolerance

Frequency Tolerance

±

10%(90~132 V)

±

5%(47~63 Hz)

Cooling Method

Weight (kg) 1.2

Natural Cooling

1.2

Fan Cooling

1.2

Voltage Class

230V Class

Model Number VFD-XXXE 002

Max. Applicable Motor Output

(kW)

0.2

Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6

Current 1.6





Rated Voltage/Frequency

Voltage Tolerance

Frequency Tolerance

Cooling Method

Weight (kg)

004

0.4

007

0.75

015

1.5

022 037

2.2 3.7

055

5.5

075

7.5

110 150

11 15

0.5

1.0

2.5

1.0

1.6

4.2

2.0

2.9

7.5

3.0

4.2

5.0

6.5

7.5

9.5

10

12.5

15

17.1

20

25

11.0 17 25 33 45 65

3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage

0.1~600 Hz

1-15

Single/3-phase 3-phase

26 34 48 70

Single/3-phase

200-240 V, 50/60Hz

3-phase

200-240V, 50/60Hz

±

10%(180~264 V)

±

5%(47~63 Hz)

Natural Cooling

1.1

1.1

1.1

*1.2/1.9

1.9 1.9

Fan Cooling

3.5

3.5

3.57

6.6

*NOTE: the weight for VFD015E23P is 1.2kg.




Appendix A Specifications|

Voltage Class

Model Number VFD-XXXE

Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)

Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)

460V Class

004 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220

0.4

0.75

1.5

0.5

1.0

2.0

2.2

3.0

3.7

5.0

5.5

7.5

7.5

10

11

15

15

20

18.5

25

22

30

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2

Rated Output Current (A)





Rated Voltage/Frequency

Voltage Tolerance

Frequency Tolerance

Cooling Method

Weight (kg)

2.0

3.3

4.4

6.8

9.9 13.7

18.3

24 29 34

1.5

1.9

2.5

4.2

3.2

5.5

8.2

13 18 24 32

4.3

3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage

0.1~600 Hz

1-15

3-phase

7.1

11.2 14 19 26 35

Natural

Cooling

1.2

1.2

1.2

38 45

41 49

3-phase, 380-480V, 50/60Hz

±

10%(342~528V)

±

5%(47~63Hz)

1.9

1.9

Fan Cooling

4.2 4.2

4.2

7.47

7.47

7.47

Control System

Frequency Setting Resolution

Output Frequency Resolution

Torque Characteristics

Overload Endurance

Skip Frequency

Accel/Decel Time

Stall Prevention Level

DC Brake

Regenerated Brake Torque

V/f Pattern

Keypad

Frequency

Setting

External Signal

Operation

Setting

Signal

Keypad

External Signal

Multi-function Input Signal

General Specifications

SPWM(Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f or sensorless vector control)

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

Including the auto-torque/auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be

150% at 3.0Hz

150% of rated current for 1 minute

Three zones, setting range 0.1-600Hz

0.1 to 600 seconds (2 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time)

Setting 20 to 250% of rated current

Operation frequency 0.1-600.0Hz, output 0-100% rated current

Start time 0-60 seconds, stop time 0-60 seconds

Approx. 20% (up to 125% possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit, 1-15hp (0.75-11kW) models have brake chopper built-in)

4-point adjustable V/f pattern

Setting by

Potentiometer-5k

Ω/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA, RS-485 interface; Multifunction Inputs 3 to 9 (15 steps, Jog, up/down)

Set by RUN and STOP

2 wires/3 wires (MI1, MI2, MI3), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface

(MODBUS), programmable logic controller

Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, 2 accel/decel switches, counter, external Base Block, ACI/AVI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN key settings, NPN/PNP input selection

A-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14


Multi-function Output Indication

Analog Output Signal

Alarm Output Contact

Operation Functions

Protection Functions

Display Keypad (optional)

Built-in Brake Chopper

Built-in EMI Filter



General Specifications

AC drive operating, frequency attained, zero speed, Base Block, fault indication, overheat alarm, emergency stop and status selections of input terminals

Output frequency/current

Contact will be On when drive malfunctions (1 Form C/change-over contact and 1 open collector output) for standard type)

Built-in PLC(NOT for CANopen models), AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, overvoltage/over-current stall prevention, 5 fault records, reverse inhibition, momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto torque/slip compensation, auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output frequency limits, parameter lock/reset, vector control, PID control, external counter, MODBUS communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving, fan control, sleep/wake frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections, 1st/2nd frequency source combination, NPN/PNP selection, parameters for motor 0 to motor 3, DEB and OOB (Out Of Balance Detection)(for washing machine)

Over voltage, over current, under voltage, external fault, overload, ground fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit, PTC

6-key, 7-segment LED with 4-digit, 5 status LEDs, master frequency, output frequency, output current, custom units, parameter values for setup and lock, faults, RUN, STOP, RESET, FWD/REV, PLC

VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,

VFD015E23T/43T, VFD007E11A/11C, VFD015E21A/21C,

VFD022E21A/21C/23A/23C/43A/43C, VFD037E23A/23C/43A/43C,

VFD055E23A/23C/43A/43C, VFD075E23A/23C/43A/43C,

VFD110E23A/23C/43A/43C, VFD150E23A/23C/43A/43C,

VFD185E43A/43C, VFD220E43A/43C

For 230V 1-phase and 460V 3-phase models.

Enclosure Rating

Pollution Degree

IP20

2

Installation Location Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust

Ambient Temperature

-10 o

C to 50 o

C (40 o

C for side-by-side mounting) Non-Condensing and not frozen

Storage/ Transportation

Temperature

Ambient Humidity

-20

o

C to 60

o

C

Below 90% RH (non-condensing)

Vibration 9.80665m/s

2

(1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s

2

(0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz

Approvals


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

A-3 http://www.automatedpt.com


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


A-4 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14



Appendix B Accessories

B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.

The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference.

Refer to the “Brake unit Module User Manual” for further details.

Applicable

Motor hp kW

AC Drive Part No.

Full

Load

Torque

KG-M

Equivalent

Resistor Value

(recommended)

Brake Unit Part

No. and

Quantity

0.25 0.2

VFD002E11A/11C/11P

VFD002E11T

VFD004E11A/11C/11P

0.5 0.4

VFD004E11T

0.110

0.216

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

1 0.75 0.427 200W 150Ω

0.25 0.2

VFD002E21A/21C/21P/23A

23C/23P

VFD002E21T/23T

VFD004E21A/21C/21P/23A

0.5 0.4

VFD004E21T/23T

VFD007E21A/21C/21P/23A

0.110

0.216

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

200W 250Ω

200W 150Ω

0.427

VFD007E21T/23T

VFD015E21A/21C

0.849

200W 150Ω

300W 85Ω

300W 85Ω

VFD015E23A/23C/23P 300W 85Ω

3 2.2 1.262

600W 50Ω

2.080 600W 50Ω

3.111 800W 37.5Ω

4.148 1200W 25Ω

6.186

1200W 8Ω

8.248 3000W 10Ω

0.5 0.4

VFD004E43T

0.216

0.427

300W 400Ω

300W 400Ω

300W 400Ω

300W 400Ω

0.849

400W 300Ω

400W 300Ω

1.262 600W 200Ω

2.080 750W 140Ω

3.111 1100W 96Ω

4.148 1500W 69Ω

6.186 2000W 53Ω

8.248 4800W 32Ω

10.281 4800W 32Ω

12.338 4800W 32Ω

Brake Resistors

Part No. and

Quantity

BUE-20015 1 BR200W250

BUE-20015 1 BR200W250

1

BR200W250 1

BUE-20015 1 BR200W250 1

BR200W250 1

BR200W150 1

1

BR200W250 1

BUE-20015 1

BR200W250

1

BR200W250 1

BUE-20015 1 BR200W150 1

BR200W150 1

-

-

BUE-20015 1 -

-

-

-

-

BR1K2W008

2

BR1K5W005 2

BUE-40015 1 BR300W400 1

BR300W400

1

BUE-40015 1 BR300W400 1

BR300W400 1

BUE-40015 1 BR200W150 2

BR200W150 2

BR300W400 2

-

-

-

-

BR1K2W008 4

BR1K2W008 4

BR1K2W008 4

Brake

Torque

10%ED

Min. Equivalent

Resistor Value for each AC

Motor Drive

320 200Ω

320 200Ω

170

100Ω

170 100Ω

140 80Ω

320 200Ω

320 200Ω

170

100Ω

170

140

100Ω

80Ω

140 80Ω

125 40Ω

125 80Ω

125 80Ω

120 40Ω

107 40Ω

85

34Ω

90 24Ω

100

119

8Ω

10Ω

400

400

200

400Ω

400Ω

200Ω

200 200Ω

140 160Ω

140 160Ω

140 140Ω

125 96Ω

120 96Ω

125 69Ω

108 53Ω

151 31Ω

121 31Ω

100 31Ω


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

B-1 http://www.automatedpt.com


Appendix B Accessories|

NOTE

1. Please select the brake unit and/or brake resistor according to the table. “-“ means no

Delta product. Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value.

2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.

3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.

4. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt.

5. Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive!

6. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC

Drive” (the right-most column in the table).

7. Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation.

8. When using with the brake resistor or brake unit, it needs to disable over-voltage stall prevention function (set Pr.06.00 to 0). It is recommended to disable AVR (auto voltage regulation) function (set Pr.08.18 to 1).

9. Definition for Brake Usage ED%

Explanation: The definition of the barking usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute

100%

Brake Time

T1

ED% = T1/T0x100(%)

Cycle Time

T0

10. For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor.

Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive.

B-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14



R/L1

S/L2

T/L3


NFB

MC

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

V/T2

IM

T/L3

W/T3

MOTOR

O.L.

Thermal

Overload

Relay or temperature switch

MC

SA

Surge

Absorber

VFD Series

Brake

Unit

B1

B2

Thermal Overload

Relay

O.L.

BR

Brake

Resistor

Temperature

Switch

Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive

user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.

Note2:

Do NOT

wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors


(Dimensions are in millimeter)

Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, BR400W150,

BR400W040

Model no.

BR080W200

BR080W750

BR300W100

BR300W250

BR300W400

BR400W150

BR400W040

L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g)

140 125 20 5.3 60 160

215 200 30 5.3 60 750

265 250 30 5.3 60 930





Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075

Model no.

BR500W030

BR500W100

BR1KW020

BR1KW075

L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g)

335 320 30 5.3 60 1100

400 385 50 5.3 100 2800


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Order P/N: BR1K0W050


Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040





Order P/N: BR200W150, BR200W250

Model no. L1

±2 L2±2 L3±2 W±1 H±1

BR200W150

165 150 110 30 60

BR200W250

B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit

Model Name BUE-XXXXX

Max. Motor Power (kW)

Max. Peak Discharge Current

(A) 10%ED

Rating Brake Start-up Voltage (DC)

230V Series

20015

1.5

20037

3.7 30

460V Series

40015 40037

45

3.6 3.7 1.5 3.7

328/345/362/380/400±3V 656/690/725/760/800±6V

DC Voltage 200~400VDC 400~800VDC

Heat Sink Overheat

Temperature over +100

°C (212 o

F)

Power Charge Display Blackout until bus (P~N) voltage is below 50VDC

Installation Location

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust)

-10

°C ∼ +50°C (14

-20

°C ∼ +60°C (-4 o o

F to 122 o

F to 140 o

F)

F)

Non-condensing

Vibration 9.8m/s

2

(1G) under 20Hz, 2m/s

2

(0.2G) at 20~50Hz

Wall-mounted Enclosed Type IP20


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit

(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch]) http://www.automatedpt.com





B.1.4 DIN Rail Installation


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart


For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times rated input current.

Model

1-phase 3-phase

VFD002E11A/11T/11C/

11P

Recommended no-fuse breaker (A)

Model

15 VFD002E23A/23C/23T/

23P

Recommended no-fuse breaker (A)

5

5 VFD002E21A/21T/21C/

21P

VFD004E11A/11C/11T/

11P

10 VFD004E23A/23C/23T/

23P

20 VFD004E43A/43C/43T/

43P

5

10 VFD004E21A/21C/21T/

21P

15 VFD007E23A/23C/23T/

23P

VFD007E11A/11C 30 VFD007E43A/43C/43T/

43P

5

VFD007E21A/21C/21T/

21P

20 VFD015E23A/23C/23T/

23P

VFD015E43A/43C/43T/

43P

20

10

VFD022E21A/21C 50 VFD022E23A/23C 30





B.3 Fuse Specification Chart

Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.

Model

I (A)

Input

I (A)

Output

I (A)

Line Fuse

6 1.6 15

Bussmann P/N

JJN-15 VFD002E11A/11T/11C/

11P

VFD002E21A/21T/21C

/21P

4.9 1.6 10 JJN-10

1.9 1.6 5 JJN-6 VFD002E23A/23C/23T

/23P

VFD004E11A/11C/11T/

11P

VFD004E21A/21C/21T

/21P

VFD004E23A/23C/23T

/23P

VFD004E43A/43C/43T

/43P

9 2.5 20

6.5 2.5 15

2.7 2.5 5

1.9 1.5 5

JJN-20

JJN-15

JJN-6

JJS-6

VFD007E11A/11C 18 4.2

VFD007E21A/21C/21T

/21P

30

9.7 4.2 20

5.1 4.2 10 VFD007E23A/23C/23T

/23P

VFD007E43A/43C/43T

/43P

3.2 2.5 5

JJN-30

JJN-20

JJN-10

JJS-6

JJN-30

JJN-20

VFD015E21A/21C 15.7 7.5

VFD015E23A/23C/23T

/23P

30

9 7.5 20

VFD015E43A/43C/43T

/43P

4.3 4.2 10

VFD022E21A/21C 24 11

VFD022E23A/23C 15 11

50

30

VFD022E43A/43C 7.1 5.5

VFD037E23A/23C 20.6 17

VFD037E43A/43C 11.2 8.2

VFD055E23A/23C 26 25

15

40

20

50

JJS-10

JJN-50

JJN-30

JJS-15

JJN-40

JJS-20

JJN-50


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Model

I (A)

Input

I (A)

Output

VFD055E43A/43C 14 13

VFD075E23A/23C 34 33

VFD075E43A/43C 19 18

VFD110E23A/23C 48 45

VFD110E43A/43C 26 24

VFD150E23A/23C 70 65

VFD150E43A/43C 35 32

VFD185E43A/43C 41 38

VFD220E43A/43C 49 45 http://www.automatedpt.com

I (A)

30

Line Fuse

Bussmann P/N

JJS-30

60

40

JJN-60

JJS-40

100

50

150

70

80

100

JJN-100

JJS-50

JJN-150

JJN-70

JJN-80

JJN-100

B.4 AC Reactor

B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value

230V, 50/60Hz, 1-Phase

Fundamental

Amps

0.2 1/4

0.4 1/2

0.75 1

1.5 2

2.2 3

230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase

4

5

8

12

18

Max. continuous

Amps

6

7.5

12

18

27

Inductance (mH)

3~5% impedance

6.5

3

1.5

1.25

0.8

B-12

0.2 1/4

0.4 1/2

0.75 1

1.5 2

Fundamental

Amps

2

2

4

8

3

3

Inductance (mH)

Max. continuous

Amps

6

12

3% impedance

9

5% impedance

20

6.5 12

3 6.5

1.5 3




Appendix B Accessories| kW HP

2.2 3

3.7 5

5.5 7.5

7.5 10

11 15

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase

12

18

25

35

45

Fundamental

0.4 1/2

0.75 1

1.5 2

2.2 3

Fundamental

Amps

Amps

2

4

4

8

3.7 5 8

5.5 7.5 12

7.5 10 18

11 15 25

15 20 35

18.5 25 35

22 30 45

Inductance (mH)

Max. continuous

Amps

18

3% impedance

5% impedance

1.25 2.5

27

37.5

52.5

67.5

Max. continuous

Amps

3

6

6

12

12

18

27

37.5

52.5

52.5

67.5

0.8 1.5

0.5

0.4 0.8

0.3 0.5

Inductance (mH)

3% impedance

20

9

6.5

5

3

2.5

1.5

1.2

0.8

0.8

0.7

1.2

5% impedance

32

12

9

7.5

5

4.2

2.5

2

1.2

1.2

1.2

B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value

115V/230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

Fundamental

Amps

1/4 4

Max. continuous

Amps

4

Inductance (mH)

3% impedance

9

5% impedance

12

1/2 6 6

1 8 12

6.5

3

9

5

2 8 12

3 12 18

5 18 27

1.5

1.25

0.8

3

2.5

1.5


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




5.5

Fundamental

Amps

Max. continuous

Amps

Inductance (mH)

3% impedance

7.5 25 37.5 0.5

5% impedance

1.2

7.5

11

15

10 35 52.5

15 55 82.5

20 80 120

0.4

0.25

0.2

0.8

0.5

0.4

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase

Fundamental

Amps

Max. continuous

Amps

Inductance (mH)

3% impedance

0.4

1/2 2 3 20

5% impedance

32

0.75 1 4 6 9 12

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

2

3

5

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

4 6 6.5 9

8 12 5 7.5

12 18 2.5 4.2

18 27 1.5 2.5

18 27 1.5 2.5

25 37.5 1.2

35 52.5 0.8

45 67.5 0.7

45 67.5 0.7

2

1.2

1.2

1.2

B.4.3 Applications

Connected in input circuit

Application 1

Question

When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one of them is ON during operation.

When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation.





Correct wiring

M1

reactor

AC motor drive motor

M2


Mn

AC motor drive

Application 2

Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power.

Correct wiring

power reactor

Silicon Controlled Rectifier

DC

motor

Question

Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on/off. These spikes may damage the mains circuit.

reactor



CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929 reactor small-capacity

AC motor drive http://www.automatedpt.com


Application 3 Question

Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from

AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the mains wiring distance

≤

10m.

When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature.

Correct wiring large-capacity

power motor





B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)

Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)

Cable type

Recommended Wire

Size

(Note) AWG mm

2

Nominal

(mm

2

)

Qty.

Wiring

Method

Singlecore

≦

10 ≦5.3

≦

5.5

Threecore

≦

≦

≦

2 ≦33.6 ≦38

12 ≦3.3

≦

3.5

1 ≦42.4 ≦50

1

4

1

4

Diagram

A

Diagram

B

Diagram

A

Diagram

B

Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.

Diagram A

Please wind each wire 4 times around the core. The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible.

Zero Phase Reactor

Diagram B

Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding.

Zero Phase Reactor

Power

Supply

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

MOTOR

Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors.

Note 2: Only the phase conductors should pass through, not the earth core or screen.

Note 3: When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable.

Power

Supply

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

MOTOR


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


B.6 Remote Controller RC-01

Dimensions are in millimeter http://www.automatedpt.com

8 6

5

4 16 15 14 13 11

RC-01Terminal block

AFM ACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 MI1 MI2 MI6

VFD-E Programming:

Pr.02.00 set to 2

Pr.02.01 set to 1 (external controls)

Pr.04.04 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)

Pr.04.07 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset)

Pr.04.08 (MI6) set to 8 (JOG operation)

(Wiring connections)

VFD-E I/O block





B.7 PU06

B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06

Frequency Command

Status indicator

Output Frequency

Status indicator

User Defined Units

Status indicator

JOG

By pressing JOG key,

Jog frequency operation.

UP and DOWN Key

Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency.

Left Key

M ove cursor to the left.

F

H

U

JOG

VFD-PU06

EXT PU

PU

LED Display

Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units, read, and save, etc.

Model Number

Status Display

Display the driver's current status.

MODE

Change between different display mode.

Right key

Move the cursor to the right

FWD/REV Key

Select FWD/REV operation.

RUN

STOP

RESET

STOP/RESET

Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred.

RUN Key

Start AC drive operation.

B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message

Display Message Descriptions

The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command.

The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W.

The custom unit (u)

The output current present at terminals U, V, and W.

Press to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to PU06. (read

0 – read 3)

Press to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from the digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show the type of

AC motor drive.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Display Message Descriptions

The specified parameter setting.

The actual value stored in the specified parameter.

External Fault

“End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the

or keys.

“Err” displays if the input is invalid.

Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user manual

(Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more details.

B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart

VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart

B-20

Or

XX

XX-XX

XXXXX

Press UP key to select

SAVE or READ.

Press PROG/DATA for about 2 seconds or until it is flashing, then save parameters from PU06 to

AC drive or read parameters from AC drive to PU06 .

-ERR-

Cannot write in

-END-

Succeed to

Write in





B.8 KPE-LE02

B.8.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02

3

1

2

4 6

5

7

8

1

Status Display

Display the driver's current status.

2

3

LED Display

Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units and etc.

Potentiometer

For master Frequency setting.

4

RUN Key

Start AC drive operation.

Display Message

5 UP and DOWN Key

Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency.

6 MODE

Change between different display mode.

8

7 STOP/RESET

Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred.

ENTER

Used to enter/modify programming parameters

Descriptions

Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.

Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05)

Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

Displays the AC motor drive forward run status.

Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status.

The counter value (C).

Displays the selected parameter.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Display Message Descriptions

Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.

External Fault.

Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing key. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the and

keys.

Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.

NOTE

When the setting exceeds 99.99 for those numbers with 2 decimals (i.e. unit is 0.01), it will only display 1 decimal due to 4-digital display.





B.8.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad

Setting Mode

START

GO START

NOTE: In the selection mode, press

Setting parameters

to set the parameters.

NOTE：In the parameter setting mode, you can press or

Success to set parameter.

Input data error to return the selecting mode.

To shift data

Setting direction

(When operation source is digital keypad)

Setting PLC Mode

enter PLC1 mode enter PLC2 mode


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B.8.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital

Keypad

Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LED

Display

English alphabet

LED

Display

English alphabet

A f a

－

G

B

－ g

C

H c h

D

－

I d i

E e

－

F

J j K

LED

Display

English alphabet

LED

Display

English alphabet

LED

Display

English alphabet

LED

Display

English alphabet

LED

Display

－ k

－ p

－ u

－ z

－

L

Q

－

V

－

－ l

－ q v

M

R

－

W

－ m

－ r w

－

N

－

S

X

－ n s

－ x

－

O

T

Y o t y

－

P

U

Z

B.8.4 Keypad Dimensions

(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch])

71.9 [2.83] 25.9 [1.02] 8.6 [0.34]

M3*0.5(2X)

52.4 [2.06]

B-24

16.3 [0.64] 1.5 [0.06] 61.0 [2.40]





B.9 Extension Card

For details, please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.

Installation method

B.9.1 Relay Card


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B.9.2 Digital I/O Card

EME-D33A

B-26

B.9.3 Analog I/O Card

EME-A22A

B.9.4 Communication Card

CME-USB01




Appendix B Accessories| connect to extension card connect to PC

B.9.5 Speed Feedback Card

EME-PG01

B.10 Fieldbus Modules

B.10.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01)

B.10.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions

1. For RS-485 connection to VFD-E 2. Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3. Address selector 4. Baud rate selector 5. Three LED status indicators for monitor.

(Refer to the figure below)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



CALL NOW 800-985-6929

3 4 5

125K

250K

500K

ADD1 ADD2 BAUD

NET MOD SP

CME-DN01

2

72.2 [2.84]

35.8 [1.41]

1

3.5 [0.14] http://www.automatedpt.com

UNIT: mm(inch)

B.10.1.2 Wiring and Settings

Refer to following diagram for details.

MAC address Date Rate Setting baud rate

125K

250K

500K

ADD1 ADD2 BAUD

NET MOD SP

CME-DN01

0

Setting MAC addresses: use decimal system.

V+ CAN-H

Empty

Pin

CAN-L V-

1: Reserved

2: EV

3: GND

4: SG-

5: SG+

6: Reserved

7: Reserved

8: Reserved

BAUD

Switch

Value

Baud

Rate

0 125K

ADD1 ADD2

1 250K

2 500K

Other AUTO

B-28

B.10.1.3 Mounting Method

Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD-E. The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference.





Dimensions STEP 1 STEP 2

UNIT: mm(inch)

B.10.1.4 Power Supply

No external power is needed. Power is supplied via RS-485 port that is connected to VFD-E.

An 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with this communication module, is used to connect the RS-485 port between VFD-E and this communication module for power. This communication module will perform the function once it is connected. Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications.

B.10.1.5 LEDs Display

1. SP: Green LED means in normal condition, Red LED means abnormal condition.

2. Module: Green blinking LED means no I/O data transmission, Green steady LED means

I/O data transmission OK.

Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal.

3. Network: Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal, Red LED means abnormal

NOTE

Refer to user manual for detail information-- Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B.10.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01)

B.10.2.1 Introduction

Device CME-LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk.

CME-LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first, so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network. No need to set CME-LW01 address.

This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME-LW01 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD-E (firmware version of VFD-E should conform with CME-

LW01 according to the table below) via LonWorks Network.

B.10.2.2 Dimensions

72.2 [2.84]

SP

CME-LW 01

34.8 [1.37] 3.5 [0.14]

B-30

B.10.2.3 Specifications

Power supply:

Communication:

LonTalk:

LonTalk terminal:

16-30VDC, 750mW

Modbus in ASCII format, protocol: 9600, 7, N, 2 free topology with FTT-10A 78 Kbps.

4-pin terminals, wire gauge: 28-12 AWG, wire strip length: 7-8mm

RS-485 port: 8 pins with RJ-45





B.10.2.4 Wiring

Service LED

Service Pin

Power LED SP LED

SP

CME-LW 01

1: Reserved

2: EV

3: GND

4: SG-

5: SG+

6: Reserved

7: Reserved

8: Reserved

1 2 3 4

1

2

LonTalk LonTalk

Terminal definition for LonTalk system

Terminal Symbol Function

These are twisted pair cables to connect to LonTalk system. Terminals 1 and 2 should be used as one group, and the same for terminals 3 and 4.

3

4

B.10.2.5 LED Indications

There are three LEDs in front panel of CME-LW01. If the communication is normal, power

LED, SP LED should be green (red LED means abnormal communication) and service LED should be OFF. If LEDs display do not match, refer to user manual for details.

B.10.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01)


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B.10.3.1 Panel Appearance

Address Switches NET LED

SP LED

ADDH ADDL

NET SP

CME-P B01

RS-485 (RJ45)

1: Reserved

2: EV

3: GND

4: SG-

5: SG+

6: Reserved

7: Reserved

8: Reserved

Profibus-DP

Interface (DB9)

1. SP LED: Indicating the connection status between VFD-E and CME-PD01.

2. NET LED: Indicating the connection status between CME-PD01 and PROFIBUS-DP.

3. Address Switches: Setting the address of CME-PD01 on PROFIBUS- DP network.

4. RS-485 Interface (RJ45): Connecting to VFD-E, and supply power to CME-PD01.

B-32 network.

6. Extended Socket: 4-PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network.





B.10.3.2 Dimensions

72.2 [2.84]

ADDH ADDL

NET SP

CME-P B01

34.8 [1.37]

UNIT: mm(inch)

B.10.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-E

VFD-E

Baud Rate 9600 Pr.09.01=1

RTU 8, N, 2

Freq. Source

Command Source

Pr.09.04=3

Pr.02.00=4

Pr.02.01=3

B.10.3.4 Power Supply

The power of CME-PD01 is supplied from VFD-E. Please connect VFD-E to CME-PD01 by using 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with CME-PD01. After connection is completed, CME-PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD-E.

B.10.3.5 PROFIBUS Address

CME-PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address. The set value via 2 address switches, ADDH and ADDL, is in HEX format. ADDH sets the upper 4 bits, and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Address Meaning

0 or 0x7E..0xFE

B.10.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)

Invalid PROFIBUS address

CME-COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD-E AC motor drive.

B-34

B.10.4.1 Product Profile

7 6 3 4 5

2

1

Unit: mm c

COM port d

CANopen connection port e

RUN indicator f

ERROR indicator g

SP (Scan Port) indicator h

Baud rate switch i

Address switch

B.10.4.2 Specifications

CANopen Connection

Interface Pluggable connector (5.08mm)

Transmission method

Transmission cable

Electrical isolation

CAN

2-wire twisted shielded cable

500V DC





Communication

Message type

Product code

Device type

Vendor ID

Process Data Objects

(PDO)

Service Data Object

(SDO)

Synchronization

(SYNC)

Emergency (EMCY)

Network Management

(NMT)

Baud rate

Delta VFD-E AC motor drive 22

402

477

10 Kbps

20 Kbps

50 Kbps

125 Kbps

250 Kbps

500 Kbps

800 Kbps

1 Mbps

Environmental Specifications

Noise Immunity

Environment

ESD(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge

EFT(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV,

Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV

Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV

RS(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m

Operation: 0°C ~ 55°C (Temperature), 50 ~ 95% (Humidity), Pollution degree 2;

Storage: -40°C ~ 70°C (Temperature), 5 ~ 95% (Humidity)

Vibration /

Shock

Resistance

Standard: IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6（TEST Fc/IEC1131-2 & IEC 68-2-27

(TEST Ea)

Certifications Standard: IEC 61131-2,UL508

B.10.4.3 Components

Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port

To connect with CANopen, use the connector enclosed with CME-COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring.

Pin Signal Content

1 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V-

2 CAN_L Signal-

3 SHIELD Shield

4 CAN_H Signal+

1 2 3 4 5

5 - Reserved

Baud Rate Setting

Rotary switch (BR) sets up the communication speed on

CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 0 ~ 7 (8 ~F are forbidden)

3

5

6

7 8 9 A

B

D

2

01

EF

BR


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Example: If you need to set up the communication speed of CME-COP01 as 500K, simply switch BR to “5”.

BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate

0 10K 4 250K

1 20K 5 500K

2 50K 6 800K

3 125K 7 1M

MAC ID Setting

Rotary switches (ID_L and ID_H) set up the

Node-ID on CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 00 ~ 7F (80 ~FF are forbidden)

3

5

6

7 8 9 A

B

D

2

01

EF

3

5

6

7 8 9 A

B

D

2

01

EF

ID_H ID_L

Example: If you need to set up the communication address of CME-COP01 as 26(1AH), simply switch ID_H to “1” and ID_L to “A”.

Switch Setting Content

0 … 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting

Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting

B.10.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting

There are 3 LED indicators, RUN, ERROR and SP, on CME-COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME-COP01.

RUN LED

LED Status

OFF

Single Flash

(Green)

Blinking

(Green)

No power

STOPPED

State

PRE-OPERATIONAL

Indication

No power on CME-COP01 card

CME-COP01 is in STOPPED state

CME-COP01 is in the PRE-

OPERATIONAL state

Green ON

Red ON

OPERATIONAL

Configuration error

CME-COP01 is in the

OPERATIONAL state

Node-ID or Baud rate setting error





ERROR LED

LED Status State Indication

OFF No error

Single Flash

(Red)

Warning limit reached

CME-COP01 is working condition

At least one of error counter of the

CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level (too many error frames)

Double Flash

(Red)

Red ON

Error control event

Bus-off

A guard event or heartbeat event has occurred

The CANopen controller is bus-off

SP LED

LED Status

OFF

LED Blinking

(Red)

Red ON

LED ON

LED OFF

LED blinking

LED single flash

No Power

State

CRC check error

Connection failure/No connection

LED Blinking

(Green)

Green ON

LED Descriptions

CME-COP01 returns error code

Normal

State

On for 0.2s and off for 1s

Indication

No power on CME-COP01 card

Check your communication setting in

VFD-E drives (19200,<8,N,2>,RTU)

1. Check the connection between

VFD-E drive and CME-COP01 card is correct

2. Re-wire the VFD-E connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct

Check the PLC program, ensure the index and sub-index is correct

Communication is normal

Description

Constantly on

Constantly off

Flash, on for 0.2s and off for 0.2s

LED double flash

On for 0.2s off for 0.2s, on for 0.2s and off for 1s


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



B.11 DIN Rail

B.11.1 MKE-DRA






B.11.2 MKE-DRB

B.11.3 MKE-EP

EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable

C CLAMP

TWO HOLE STRAP

1

TWO HOLE STRAP

2


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B.12 EMI Filter

To meet EN61800-3 variable speed drive system- part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods, category C1, C2 and C3. Users can choose the suitable filter by the following table.

1-phase/

3-phase

Voltage

HP

AC Motor Drive

Frame Deltron Filter C3 C2

0.25

VFD002E21A A

A

MDF16 50m 50m

C1

50m

1-phase 230V

0.5

VFD004E21A

1 VFD007E21A

2 VFD015E21A

3 VFD022E21A

0.5

VFD004E43A

1 VFD007E43A

A

B

MDF25 50m 50m Fail*

B

A

A

KMF306A 50m 50m 50m

3-phase 460V

2 VFD015E43A

3 VFD022E43A

5 VFD037E43A

7.5

VFD055E43A

10 VFD075E43A

15 VFD110E43A

A

B

KMF318A

B

C

C

KMF325A

C

50m

75m

50m

50m

50m

50m

NOTE: For model VFD022E21A, please use MIF filter to meet Category C1.





Installation

All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an

EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use

DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.

We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired according to user manual:

EN61000-6-4

EN61800-3: 1996

EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1

General precaution

1. EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.

2. Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.

3. Please wire as short as possible.

4. Metal plate should be grounded.

5. The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area should be as large as possible.

Choose suitable motor cable and precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.

1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum contact area.

3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.

saddle the plate with grounding

Saddle on both ends

Saddle on one end

The length of motor cable

When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:

Use a motor with enhanced insulation.

Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive

The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible

(10 to 20 m or less)

For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:

Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V

460VAC input voltage 66 ft (20m) 328 ft (100m) 1312 ft (400m)

230VAC input voltage 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m)





NOTE

When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less.

To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 02.03 PWM carrier frequency).

NOTE

Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.

If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage.

If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



CALL NOW 800-985-6929





Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive

The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.

But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions, including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on your requirements.

Related Specification

Item

Speed and torque characteristics

Time ratings

Overload capacity

Starting torque

Load type

Load speed and torque characteristics

Load characteristics

Friction load and weight load

Liquid (viscous) load

Inertia load

Load with power transmission

Constant torque

Constant output

Decreasing torque

Decreasing output

Constant load

Shock load

Repetitive load

High starting torque

Low starting torque

Continuous operation, Short-time operation

Long-time operation at medium/low speeds

Maximum output current (instantaneous)

Constant output current (continuous)

Maximum frequency, Base frequency

Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance

Voltage fluctuations and unbalance

Number of phases, single phase protection

Frequency

Mechanical friction, losses in wiring

Duty cycle modification

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

C-1 http://www.automatedpt.com

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

C.1 Capacity Formulas


1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor

The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive

The starting capacity=

973

×

k

η

×

×

N

cos ϕ

⎝

⎜⎜

⎛

T

L

+

GD

375

2

×

t

N

A

⎠

⎟⎟

⎞

≤

1 .

5

×

the

_

capacity

_

of

2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

kVA

)

2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive


η

k

×

×

N

cos ϕ

[

n

T

+

n s

(

k s

−

1

) ]

=

P

C

1

⎢

⎢

⎣

⎡

⎢

1

+

n s n

T

(

k s

−

1

⎥

⎥

⎦

⎤

⎥

)

≤

1 .

5

×

the

_

capacity

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

kVA

)


η

k

×

×

N

cos ϕ

[

n

T

+

n s

(

k s

−

1

) ]

=

P

C

1

⎣

⎡

⎢

⎢

1

+

n s n

T

(

k s

−

1

)

⎥

⎦

⎤

⎥

≤

the

_

capacity

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

kVA

)

2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)

n

T

+

I

M

⎡

⎢

1

+

n n

S

T

k

S

−

1

⎤

⎥

≤

1 .

5

×

the

_

rated

_

current

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

A

)

n

T

+

I

M

⎣

⎢

⎡

1

+

n n

S

T

⎝

⎜

⎛

k

S

−

1

⎞

⎠

⎟

⎤

⎦

⎥

≤

the

_

rated

_

current

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

A

)

C-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14




2.3 When it is running continuously

The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)

The requirement of load capacity=

η

k

×

P

M

× cos ϕ

≤

the

_

capacity

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

kVA

)

The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive

k

×

3

×

V

M

×

I

M

×

10

−

3

≤

the

_

capacity

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

kVA

)

The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)

k

×

I

M

≤

the

_

rated

_

current

_

of

_

AC

_

motor

_

drive

(

A

)

Symbol explanation

P

M

: Motor shaft output for load (kW)

η

: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85) cos ϕ

: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)

V

M

I

M

k

: Motor rated voltage(V)

: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power

P

C

1

k

S

: Starting current/rated current of motor

n

T

: Number of motors in parallel

n

S

: Number of simultaneously started motors

GD

2

: Total inertia (GD

2

) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m

2

)

: Load torque

T

L t

A

N

: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on

PWM method)

: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)

: Motor acceleration time

: Motor speed


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


C.2 General Precaution


Selection Note

1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer

(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency.

2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single

AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current

≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents).

3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.

(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.

4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor

Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.

Parameter Settings Note

1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.

2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended.

3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.

4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the




Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.

C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor

Standard motor

When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following precautions:

1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.

2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.

3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased.

4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:

Load duty-cycle

25%

40%

100

82

60%

70

60

50 continuous

0

3 6 20 60

Frequency (Hz)

5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor.

6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected.

8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the

following motor vibration problems:

Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed.

Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency.

To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.

9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.

Special motors:

1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:

The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).

The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between

AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.

3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:

Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions.

4. Gear reduction motor:

The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.

C-6

The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC




Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor.

Power Transmission Mechanism

Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.

Motor torque

The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different.

Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):

AC motor drive Motor

180

155

140

180

155

60 seconds

100 100

80

55

38

0320 60

120

Frequency (Hz)

Base freq.: 60Hz

V/F for 220V/60Hz

55

38

0320 60

120

Frequency (Hz)

Base freq.: 60Hz

V/F for 220V/60Hz

140

130

100

85

68

45

35

60 seconds

180

150

100

80

45

35

60 seconds

0320 50

120

Frequency (Hz)

Base freq.: 50Hz

V/F for 220V/50Hz


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

0

3 20

50 120

Frequency (Hz)

Base freq.: 50Hz

V/F for 220V/50Hz


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


This page intentionally left blank.





Appendix D How to Use PLC Function

※ This function is NOT for VFD*E*C models.

D.1 PLC Overview

D.1.1 Introduction

The PLC function built in the VFD-E provides following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and application commands. The operation methods are the same as Delta DVP-

PLC series.

D.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft

WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series for WINDOWS.

Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts monitor and set, etc.).

Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:

Item System Requirement

Operation

System

CPU

Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP

Pentium 90 and above

Memory

Hard Disk

Monitor

16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)

Capacity: 50MB and above

CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)

Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above,

It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600.

Mouse General mouse or the device compatible with Windows

Printer Printer with Windows driver

RS-232 port At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC

Applicable

Models

All Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

D-1 http://www.automatedpt.com

Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|

D.2 Start-up


D.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution

Please operate PLC function by the following five steps.

1. Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download/upload:

A. Go to “PLC0” page by pressing the MODE key

B. Change to “PLC2” by pressing the “UP” key and then press the “ENTER” key after confirmation

C. If succeeded, “END” is displayed and back to “PLC2” after one or two seconds.

Disable

Run PLC Read/write PLC program

into AC drives

NOTE

You don’t need to care about the PLC warning, such as PLod, PLSv and PldA, before downloading a program to VFD-E.

2. Connection: Please connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485-to-RS232 converter.

RS485

3. Run the program. The PLC status will always be PLC2, even if the AC motor drive is switched off.

There are three ways to operate PLC:

A. In “PLC1” page: execute PLC program.

B. In “PLC2” page: execute/stop PLC program by using WPL software.

C. After setting multi-function input terminals (MI3 to MI9) to 23 (RUN/STOP PLC), it will display “PLC1” for executing PLC when the terminal is ON. It will display “PLC0” to stop

PLC program when terminals are OFF.

NOTE

When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON, it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode. Moreover, when it is PLC2, you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals.

D-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14




NOTE

When power on after power off, the PLC status will be in “PLC1”.

4. When you are in “PLC2”, please remember to change to “PLC1” when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program.

NOTE

When output/input terminals (MI1~MI9, Relay1~Relay 4, MO1~MO4) are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. For example, When Y0 in PLC program is activated, the corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this moment, parameter 03.00 setting will be invalid. Because the terminal has been used by PLC.

NOTE

The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are X0 to X5. When extension card are added, the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter D.2.2.

D.2.2 Device Reference Table

Device

ID

Terminals of AC

Drives

3IN/3OUT Card

(EME-D33A)

0 1 2 3

X

4 5 6 7 10

MI1 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- MI7 MI8 MI9


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Device

ID

Terminals of AC

Drives

Relay Card-2C

(EME-DR2CA)

Relay Card-3A

(EME-R3AA)

3IN/3OUT Card

(EME-D33A)

0

RY

--

1

Y

2 3 4

-- MO2 MO3 MO4

D.2.3 WPLSoft Installation

Download PLC program to AC drive: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for writing program and download the editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/plc/plc_software.asp.

D-4

D.2.4 Program Input





D.2.5 Program Download

Please do following steps for program download.

Step 1. Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.

Step 2. After finishing compiler, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.

After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format.

D.2.6 Program Monitor

If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder diagram will be shown as follows.

D.2.7 The Limit of PLC

1. The protocol of PLC is 7,E,1

2. Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload/download.

3. The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ > WPR.

4. When setting P 00.04 to 2, the display will be the value in PLC register D1043.

A. 0 ~ 999 display:


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




B. 1000 ~ 9999 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the bottom-right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value. For example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X10=1000.

C. 10000~65535 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the bottom-right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right-most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value. For example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X100=10000.

5. When it is changed to “PLC2”, RS-485 will be used by PLC.

6. When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode, the function to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled (i.e. Pr.00.02 can’t be set to 9 or 10).





D.3 Ladder Diagram

D.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram

Read input state from outside

Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately.)

X0 X1

Start

Y0

M100 X3

X10

:

:

X100 M505

Y0

Y1

Y126

End

Execute in cycles

Send the result to the output point

D.3.2 Introduction

Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.

The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF.

You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| use byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times.

In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.

Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC:

Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.

If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t be used with other functions.

Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal.

Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.

Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal.

Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in

PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with output point.

Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M159. The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system.

Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.

Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero.

Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T15. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period.

D-8

Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.

When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.

Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C7. The symbol of equipment is C and the number uses decimal.

Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores





16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words.

Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D29. The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal.

The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:

Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment

Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, T, C

Normally closed, contact b LDI X, Y, M, T, C

Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, T, C

Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, T, C

Parallel normally closed ORI X, Y, M, T, C

Rising-edge trigger switch

Falling-edge trigger switch

Rising-edge trigger in serial

Falling-edge trigger in serial

LDP

LDF

ANDP

ANDF

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

Rising-edge trigger in parallel ORP X, Y, M, T, C

Falling-edge trigger in parallel ORF X, Y, M, T, C

Block in serial ANB none

Block in parallel ORB none


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command http://www.automatedpt.com

Equipment

Multiple output

MPS

MRD

MPP none

Output command of coil drive

Basic command, Application command

OUT Y, M, S

Application command

Please refer to basic command and application command

Inverse logic INV none

D.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row.

The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1

00000

00000

X11 X12 X13

Y0

Row Number

The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram.

Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is the explanation order.

X0

M0

X3

X1

M1

Y1

T0

X4

M3

Y1

TMR T0 K10




The explanation of command order:

1 LD X0


2 OR M0

3 AND X1

4 LD X3

AND M1

ORB

5 LD Y1

AND X4

6 LD T0

AND M3

ORB

7 ANB

8 OUT Y1

TMR T0 K10

The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram

1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.

LD command LD command

AND Block OR Block

The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following.

Rising-edge

Falling-edge

X0

X0

Time

OFF

ON OFF

OFF

ON OFF

2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.

AND command AND command

Time


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or fallingedge.

3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.

OR command OR command OR command

The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.

4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.

ANB command

5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.

ORB command

If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right.

D-12

6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs.

7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line.

Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol “

┬”.

8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep




Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol

“

├”.

9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack.

Because it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.

MPS

You can recognize this command by the symbol

“└”. Basically, that is all right to use the above method to analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same outputs as shown at the right.

MRD

MPS

MPP

MPP

D.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program

Start, Stop and Latching

There are several latching circuits in the following:

Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop

In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit.

Y1 X2

When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On are set at

Y1

X1 the same time, if X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of stop.

Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start

When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally contact X2＝Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid at the same time, if

X2=On, coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.

X1

Y1

X2

Y1


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands

The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made

Top priority of stop

X1 up of RST and SET command.

It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind SET command. When executing PLC from up

X2 to down, The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls

Top priority of start priority of stop.

X2

It is top priority of start when SET command is set after

RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start.

X1

The common control circuit

Example 4: condition control

X1

X3

Y1

Y1

X2

Y2

X4 Y1

Y2

X1

X3

X2

X4

Y1

Y2

SET

RST

RST

SET

Y1

Y1

Y1

Y1

X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.





Example 5: Interlock control

X1

X3 Y2

Y1

X2

X4

Y1

Y1

Y2

X4

Y1

Y2

X1

X3

X2

Y2

The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and

Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.

Example 6: Sequential Control

X1

X3

Y2

Y1

X2

Y2

X4 Y1

Y1

Y2

If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting.

In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential.

Example 7: Oscillating Circuit

The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT

Y1

Y1

Y1

T T

The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan

Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be

OFF. The result of repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle timeΔ

T(On)+ΔT(Off).


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT(On)+ΔT(Off):

X0 Y1

TMR T0 Kn

T0

X0

Y1

Y1 http://www.automatedpt.com

n T T

The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))

Example 8: Blinking Circuit

X0 T2

TMR T1 Kn1 X0

T1 n2 * T

TMR T2 Kn2

Y1

X0 T1

Y1 n1 *

T

The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer (clock period)

Example 9: Triggered Circuit

X0

M0

X0

M0

Y1

T

Y1

M0

M0 Y1

Y1

In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil

M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.





Example 10: Delay Circuit

X0

TMR

T10

Y1

T10 K1000

X0

Y1

TB = 0.1 sec

100 seconds

When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is

ON. Please refer to timing chart above.

Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.

X0

TMR T5 K50

T5 T6

Y4

X0

5 seconds

T5

Y4

Y0

Y4 X0

TMR T6 K30

T6

3 seconds

Example12: Extend Timer Circuit

X0

TMR T11

T11

TMR T12

T12

Y1

Kn1

Kn2

In this circuit, the total delay time from input

X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is clock period.

X0 n1*

T

T11 n2*

T

T12

Y1

(n1+n2)* T


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



D.4 PLC Devices


D.4.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number

Items

Control Method

I/O Processing Method

Execution Speed

Program Language

Program Capacity

Specifications Remarks

Stored program, cyclic scan system

Batch processing (when END instruction is executed)

I/O refresh instruction is available

Basic commands (minimum

0.24 us)

Application commands

(10 ~ hundreds us)

Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC

Including the Step commands

500 STEPS SRAM + Battery

28 basic commands

Input/Output Contact

X External Input Relay

Y External Output Relay

M Auxiliary

For general

For special commands

Input (X): 6, output (Y): 2

X0~X17, 16 points, octal number system

Y0~Y17, 16 points, octal number system

Total is

Correspond to external input point

32 points Correspond to external output point

M0~M159, 160 points

M1000~M1031, 32 points

Total is

192 points

Contacts can switch to

On/Off in program

T Timer 100ms timer T0~T15, 16 points

Total is

16 points

When the timer indicated by TMR command attains the setting, the T contact with the same number will be On.

16-bit count up for general

C0~C7, 8 points

C Counter

32-bit count up/down highspeed counter

1-phase input

1-phase 2 inputs

2-phase 2 inputs

C235, 1 point (need to use with PG card)

Total is

8 points

Total is

1 point

When the counter indicated by CNT command attains the setting, the C contact with the same number will be On.




T Present value of timer

C Present value of counter

D

Data register

K Decimal

Items

For latched

For general

For special


Specifications Remarks

T0~T15, 16 points

C0~C7, 8-bit counter, 8 points

When timer attains, the contact of timer will be

On.

D0~D9, 10 points

When timer attains, the contact of timer will be

On.

D10~D29, 20 points

D1000~D1044, 45 points

Total is

75 points

It can be memory area for storing data.

K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)

Communication port (for read/write program)

Analog input/output

Function extension module (optional)

RS485 (slave)

Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output

Digital input/output card (A/D, D/A card)

D.4.2 Devices Functions

The Function of Input/output Contacts

The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the

On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).

The Function of Output Contact Y

The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program.

But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program.

Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




X0

Y0

1

The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit

○

, i.e. decided by On/Off of X10.

Y0 is repeated

X10

Y0

2

D.4.3 Value, Constant [K] / [H]

Constant

K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)

There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the explanation of value types.

1. Binary Number (BIN)

It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the following.

Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.

Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.

Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to represent

00~FF of hexadecimal system.

Word

Double

Word

: It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent

0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.

: It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.

The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.

DW

Double Word

W1 W0

Word

BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0

Byte

NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0

Nibble

D-20

Bit

2. Octal Number (OCT)

The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.

Example:

External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number)





External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number)

3. Decimal Number (DEC)

The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)

To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)

To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)

4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)

It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7-segment display to be display.

5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX)

The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)

Constant K:

In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in decimal number.

Exception:

The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.

Constant H:

In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example,

H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number.

D.4.4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly. There are two types divided by its characteristics.

1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its state will be Off when power on after power loss.

2. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don’t use undefined auxiliary relay.

D.4.5 The Function of Timer

The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as settings.

The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




D.4.6 The Features and Functions of Counter

Features:

Item 16 bits counters

Type General

Count direction Count up

Settings 0~32,767

Designate for constant

Present value change

Count up/down

32 bits counters

-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)

Output contact

Counter will stop when attaining settings

Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings

When count attains settings, contact will be On and latched.

When count up attains settings, contact will be On and latched.

When count down attains settings, contact will reset to Off.

Reset action

The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to Off.

Present register 16 bits 32 bits

Contact action After scanning, act together.

After scanning, act together.

Act immediately when count attains. It has no relation with scan period.

Functions:

When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.

16-bit counters C0~C7:

1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be On immediately at the first count.

2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.

3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings.

4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register

D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.

5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768.





Example:

LD X0

RST C0

LD X1

CNT C0 K5

LD C0

OUT Y0

1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off.

2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1).

3. When counter C0 attains settings

K5, C0 contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0 won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 remains

K5.

X0

X1

X0

X1

C0

C0 present value

0

RST

CNT

Y0

1

2

C0

C0

3

4

K5

5 settings

0

Contacts Y0, C0

32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235:

1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is :

K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.

2. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D

The total band width of high-speed counter that VFD-E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input.

(special data register D1000~D1044 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data register.

D.4.7 Register Types

There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following:

1. General register

: The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or power is off.

2. Special register

: Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system status, error messages, monitor state.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




D.4.8 Special Auxiliary Relays

Special

M

Function

M1000

Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is

On when the status is set to RUN.

M1001

M1002

M1003

Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off in running and it is Off when the status is set to RUN.

On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.

Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.

M1004 Reserved

M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives

M1006 Output frequency is 0

M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: 0, REV: 1)

M1008 Reserved

M1009 Reserved

M1010 Reserved

Read(R)/

Write(W)

R

R

R

R

M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off

M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off

M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off

M1016 Parameter read/write error

M1017 Succeed to write parameter

M1018 Enable high-speed counter function (When M1028=On)

M1019 Reserved

M1024 Reserved

M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

--

R/W

--

R

R

R

R

R

--

R

R

R

--

--




Special

M

Function


Read(R)/

Write(W)

M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON)

M1027 Reserved

R/W

--

M1029 Clear the value of high-speed counter

M1030 Decide to count up(OFF)/count down(ON)

M1031 Reserved

R/W

R/W

R/W

--

D.4.9 Special Registers

Special D

D1000 Reserved

D1001 PLC firmware version

Function Read(R)/ Write(W)

--

R

D1003 Checksum

D1004-

D1009

R

R

Reserved --

D1010 Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) R

D1011 Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)

D1012 Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)

D1013-

D1019

R

R

Reserved --

R

R

D1022

The ID of the extension card:

02 USB Card

03 12-Bit A/D (2CH) 12-Bit D/A (2CH)

04 Relay Card-2C

05 Relay Card-3A

06 3IN/3OUT Card

07 PG Card

R

D1023-

D1024

Reserved --


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Special D Function

D1025 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (low byte)

D1026 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (high byte)

Read(R)/ Write(W)

R

R

D1027 Frequency command of the PID control

D1028

D1029

The value of AVI (analog voltage input) 0-10V corresponds to 0-

1023

The value of ACI (analog current input) 4-20mA corresponds to 0-

1023 or the value of AVI2 (analog voltage input) 0-10V corresponds to 0-1023

R

R

R

D1030 The value of V.R digital keypad 0-10V corresponds to 0-1023

D1031-

D1035

R

Reserved --

R

D1037-

D1039

Reserved --

D1040 Analog output value

D1041-

D1042

R/W

Reserved --

D1043

User defined (when Pr.00.04 is set to 2, the register data will be displayed as C xxx)

R/W

R/W

D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode)

Device Range Type

X 00–17 Bit

Address (Hex)

0400-040F

Y 00–17 Bit 0500-050F

T 00-15 Bit/word 0600-060F

M 000-159 Bit 0800-089F

M 1000-1031 Bit 0BE8-0C07

C 0-7 Bit/word 0E00-0E07

D 00-63 Word 1000-101D

D 1000-1044 Word 13E8-1414





NOTE: when it is in PLC1 mode, the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device. For example, address 0400H will correspond to Pr.04.00 NOT X0.

D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode)

Function Code Description Supported Devices

01 Read coil status Y, M, T, C

02 Read input status X, Y, M, T, C

03

05

06

0F

10

Read one data

Force changing one coil status

Write in one data

Force changing multiple coil status

Write in multiple data

T, C, D

Y, M, T, C

T, C, D

Y, M, T, C

T, C, D

D.5 Commands

D.5.1 Basic Commands

Commands

LD

LDI

AND

ANI

OR

ORI

ANB

ORB

MPS

MRD

MPP

INV

Function

Load contact A

Load contact B

Series connection with A contact

Series connection with B contact

Parallel connection with A contact

Parallel connection with B contact

Series connects the circuit block

Parallel connects the circuit block

Save the operation result

Read the operation result (the pointer not moving)

Read the result

Inverter the result

Operands

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

--

--

--

X, Y, M, T, C

--

--

--


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


D.5.2 Output Commands

Commands

OUT Drive coil

Function

SET

RST

Action latched (ON)

Clear the contacts or the registers

D.5.3 Timer and Counters

Commands

TMR

CNT

16-bit timer

16-bit counter

Function

D.5.4 Main Control Commands

Commands

MC

MCR

Function

Connect the common series connection contacts

Disconnect the common series connection contacts http://www.automatedpt.com

Y, M

Operands

Y, M

Y, M, T, C, D

Operands

T-K or T-D

C-K or C-D

Operands

N0~N7

N0~N7

D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact

Commands

LDP

LDF

ANDP

ANDF

ORP

ORF

Function

Rising-edge detection operation starts

Falling-edge detection operation starts

Rising-edge detection series connection

Falling-edge detection series connection

Rising-edge detection parallel connection

Falling-edge detection parallel connection

Operands

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C

X, Y, M, T, C





D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands

Function Commands

PLS

PLF

Rising-edge output

Falling-edge output

Operands

Y, M

Y, M

D.5.7 End Command

Command Function Operands none

D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands

Mnemonic Function

Operand

Explanations:

The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register.

Program Example:

Ladder diagram Command code Operation

X0 X1

Y1

LD

AND

OUT

X0

X1

Y1

Load contact A of X0

Connect to contact A of X1 in series

Drive Y1 coil

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --


Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Explanations:

The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register.

Program Example:

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:

X0 X1

LDI X0

Load contact B of X0

Y1

AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series

OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil


AND Series connection- A contact

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

Operand

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Program Example:


X1 X0

Y1

LDI X1 Load contact B of X1

AND X0








ANI Series connection- B contact

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9

--

Explanations:

The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Program Example:


X1 X0

Y1

LD

ANI

X1

X0


Connect to contact B of

X0 in series



OR Parallel connection- A contact

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

Operand

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0

Y1

X1

Command code: Operation:

LD X0 Load contact A of X0

OR X1

OUT Y1

Connect to contact A of

X1 in parallel

Drive Y1 coil


ORI Parallel connection- B contact

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

Operand

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Program Example:


X0


X1

Y1

ORI X1

Connect to contact B of

X1 in parallel



ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)

Operand None

Explanations:

To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register.





Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0

ANB

X1

X2 X3

Block A Block B

Y1



ORI X2

LDI X1

OR X3

Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel

Load contact B of X1

Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel

ANB

OUT Y1

Connect circuit block in series

Drive Y1 coil


ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)

Operand None

Explanations:

To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register.

Program Example:


X0 X1

Block A


Y1

X2 X3

ANI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series

ORB

Block B LDI X2 Load contact B of X2

AND X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in series

ORB

OUT Y1

Connect circuit block in parallel

Drive Y1 coil


MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations

Operand None


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Explanations:

To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result operation pointer pluses 1)


MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations

Operand None

Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of operation result doesn’t move)

Explanations:


MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations

Operand None

Explanations:

Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer will decrease

1)

Program Example:


X0

MRD

MPP

MPS

X1

X2

Y1

M0

Y2

END

LD

MPS

X0

AND X1

OUT

MRD

Y1


Save in stack


Drive Y1 coil

AND X2

Read from the stack (without moving pointer)


OUT

MPP

OUT

M0

Y2

END

Drive M0 coil

Read from the stack

Drive Y2 coil






Operand None

Explanations:

Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.

Program Example:


X0

LD X0 Load A contact of X0

Y1

INV

Inverting the operation result



X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

Operand

-- 9 9 -- -- --

Explanations:

Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.

Motion of coil contact

OUT command

Operation result Coil

Contact

A contact (normally open) B contact (normally closed)

FALSE OFF Non-continuity

TRUE ON Continuity

Continuity

Non-continuity


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0 X1

Y1


LDI X0 Load contact B of X0

AND X1

OUT Y1


Drive Y1 coil


X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

Operand

-- 9 9 -- -- --

Explanations:

When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep “ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set the device to “OFF”.

Program Example:


X0 Y0


SET

Y1

ANI Y0 Connect to contact B of Y0 in series

SET Y1

Y1 latch (ON)


RST Clear the contacts or the registers

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

-- 9 9 9 9 --





Explanations:

When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:

Device Status

Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.

T, C

D

Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0

RST

Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and contact will be set to “OFF.”

The content value will be set to 0.

Y5



RST Y5

Clear contact Y5


Operand

When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the contact will be as following:

Explanations:

NO(Normally Open) contact Open collector

NC(Normally Closed) contact

Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0

TMR T5 K1000

Close collector


LD X0 Load contact A of X0 T5 timer

TMR

T5 K1000 Setting is K1000


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Mnemonic Function http://www.automatedpt.com

C-K

C0~C7, K0~K32,767

Operand

C-D C0~C7, D0~D29

Explanations:

1. When the CNT command is executed from OFFÆON, which means that the counter coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact is as follows:

NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity

NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity

2. If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use the

RST command.

Program Example:


X0

CNT C20 K100

LD X0 Load contact A of X0 C2 counter

CNT C2 K100

Setting is K100


MC / MCR Master control Start/Reset

Operand

N0~N7

Explanations:

1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows:

Timer

The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact are both turned OFF

Accumulative timer

Subroutine timer

The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition

The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and contact are turned OFF.




Counter


The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition

Coils driven up by the OUT command

Devices driven up by the

SET and RST commands

All turned OFF

Stay at present condition

Application commands

All of them are not acted , but the nest loop FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for times defined by users even though the MC-MCR commands is OFF.

2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.

3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer to the following:

Program Example:


X0

LD

X0

Load A contact of X0

X1

MC N0

MC N0

Enable N0 common series connection contact

Y0


X2

MC N1


X3

:

Y1


MC N1

X10

X11

MCR

MCR

MC

Y10

MCR

N1

N0

N0

N0

LD X3

OUT Y1

:

MCR N1

:

MCR N0



Drive Y1 coil

Disable N1 common series connection contact


:

LD X10

MC N0




CALL NOW 800-985-6929




LD X11

OUT Y10

:

MCR N0


Drive Y10 coil



LDP Rising-edge detection operation

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.

Program Example:


X0 X1

Y1

LDP X0

AND X1

OUT Y1

Start X0 rising-edge detection

Series connection A contact of X1

Drive Y1 coil


LDF Falling-edge detection operation

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.

Program Example:




Ladder diagram:

X0 X1

Y1



LDF X0

AND X1

OUT Y1

Start X0 falling-edge detection

Series connection A contact of X1

Drive Y1 coil


ANDP Rising-edge series connection

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.

Program Example:


X0 X1

Y1

LD

X0

ANDP X1

OUT Y1


X1 rising-edge detection in series connection

Drive Y1 coil


Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9

--

Explanations:

ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.

Program Example:


X0 X1

Y1

LD

X0

ANDF X1

OUT Y1


X1 falling-edge detection in series connection

Drive Y1 coil


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





ORP Rising-edge parallel connection

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge detection.

Program Example:


X0

LD

X0


X1

Y1

ORP X1

X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection



ORF Falling-edge parallel connection

Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

9 9 9 9 9 --

Explanations:

The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge detection.

Program Example:


X0

X1

Y1

LD

ORF X1

OUT

X0

Y1


X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection

Drive Y1 coil






Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

-- 9 9 -- ---

Explanations:

When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.

Program Example:


X0

LD

X0


M0

PLS

M0

PLS M0

M0 rising-edge output

SET Y0

LD M0 Load the contact A of M0

Timing Diagram:

SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON)

X0

M0

Y0 a scan time


Operand

X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29

-- 9 9 -- ---

Explanations:

When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Program Example:

Ladder diagram:

X0

PLF

M0

M0

SET Y0

Timing Diagram: http://www.automatedpt.com


LD

X0


PLF M0

LD M0

SET Y0

M0 falling-edge output

Load the contact A of M0

Y0 latched (ON)

X0

M0

Y0

a scan time


Operand

It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again.

Explanations:

D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands

API

Mnemonic

Codes

P

Command

Function

Steps

16 bits 32 bits 16-bit 32-bit

10 CMP --

Transmission

Comparison

11 ZCP --

12 MOV --

Zone compare

Data Move

9

5

--

--

Four

Fundamental

Operations of

Arithmetic

15 BMOV --

20 ADD --

21 SUB --

None

Block move

Perform the addition of

BIN data

Perform the subtraction of BIN data

7 --

7 --

7 --



Rotation and

Displacement


API

Mnemonic

16 bits

Codes

32 bits

22 MUL --


Steps

P

Command

Function

16-bit 32-bit

Perform the multiplication of BIN data

7 --

23 DIV

24 INC

--

--

Perform the division of

BIN data

Perform the addition of

1

7 --

3 --

25 DEC

30 ROR

31 ROL

--

--

--

Perform the subtraction of 1

Rotate to the right

Rotate to the left

3 --

5

5

--

--

-- 13

Special command for

AC motor drive

139 FPID --

140 FREQ --

141 RPR --

142 WPR --

Control PID parameters of inverter

Control frequency of inverter

Read the parameter

Write the parameter

D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands

API Mnemonic Operands

10 CMP P S

1

, S

2

, D

Function

Compare

5 --

5 --

9

7

Type

OP

Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

S

1

S

2

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C CMP, CMPP: 7 steps

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

D *

*

*

*

*

*

*

Operands:

S1: Comparison Value 1 S2: Comparison Value 2 D: Comparison result

--

--


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Explanations:

1. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.

2. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.

3. The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D.

4. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values.

Program Example:

1. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.

2. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2 will be On.

When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0, Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.

3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.

X10

CMP K10 D10 Y0

Y0

If K10>D10, Y0 = On

Y1

If K10=D10, Y1 = On

Y2

If K10<D10, Y2= On

4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X10 X10

RST

M0

ZRST

M0 M2

RST

M1

RST

M2






11 ZCP P S

1

, S

2

, S, D

Function

Zone Compare

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C ZCP, ZCPP: 9 steps

S

1

S

2

S

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

D *

Operands:

S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value

D: Comparison result

Explanations:

1. The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2.

2. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.


4. S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D.

5. When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower/upper bound.

6. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values.

Program Example:

1. Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.

2. When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and M2 will be On.

When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


X0

ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0

M0

If C10 < K10, M0 = On

M1 http://www.automatedpt.com

M2

If C10 > K100, M2 = On

3. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X0 X0

RST ZRST

RST

M0

M1

M0 M2

RST


12 MOV P

M2

Function

Move

Type

OP

Bit Devices

S

D

*

Word devices

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Program Steps

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D

* *

Operands:

S: Source of data D: Destination of data

Explanations:


2. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains unchanged.

Program Example:

MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16-bit data.

1. When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register.

2. When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the present value

T0 will be moved to D10 data register.





X0

MOV K10 D0

X1

MOV T0 D10


15 BMOV P S, D, n

Function

Block Move

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps

S * * * * * *

D n * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

Operands:

S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be moved

Explanations:


3. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used.

Program Example 1:

When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23.

X10

D20 K4

D0

D1

D2

D3

D20

D21

D22

D23 n=4

Program Example 2:

Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of digits of

S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


M1000

D0 D20 K4

M0

M1

M2

M3

M4

M5

M6

M7 http://www.automatedpt.com

n=3

M8

M9

M10

M11

Y10

Y11

Y12

Y13

Program Example 3:

To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers.

When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3

X10

BMOV

D20 D19 K3

D20

1

D21

2

D22

3

D19

D20

D21

When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1

X11

BMOV

D10 D11 K3

D10

D11

D12

3

2

1

D11

D12

D13

API

Mnemonic Operands

Function

20 ADD P S

1

, S

2

, D Addition

Type

OP



S

1

S

2

D

* *

* *

Operands:

S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum

*

*

*

*

*

* * * *

* * * *

* * * *





Explanations:


2. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.

3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic addition, e.g.

3

+ (-9) = -6.

4. Flag changes in binary addition

16-bit command:

A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.

B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.

C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.

Program Example 1:

16-bit command:

When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20.

X0

ADD D0 D10 D20

Remarks:

Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:

16 bit: Zero flag

Zero flag

Zero flag

-2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 1 32,767 0 1 2

Borrow flag

The highest bit of the data

= 1 (negative)


= 0 (positive)

Carry flag

32 bit: Zero flag

-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648

Borrow flag

Zero flag

-1, 0 1

Zero flag

2,147,483,647 0 1 2


= 1 (negative)


= 0 (positive)

Carry flag


CALL NOW 800-985-6929





21 SUB P S

1

, S

2

,

Function

D Subtraction

Type

OP

Bit Devices Word devices

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Program Steps


S

1

S

2

D

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * * *

DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps

Operands:

S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder

Explanations:

1. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.

2. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic subtraction.

3. Flag changes in binary subtraction

In 16-bit instruction:

A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.

B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.

C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.

Program Example:

In 16-bit BIN subtraction:

When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in

D20.

X0

SUB D0 D10 D20




API

22


Mnemonic

Operands

Function

MUL P S

1

, S

2

, D Multiplication

Type

OP

Bit Devices

S

1

S

2

D

* *

* *

*

*

Word devices

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Program Steps

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C MUL, DMULP: 7 steps

* * * * *

Operands:

S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product

Explanations:

1. In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.

2. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.

16-bit command:

S1 S2

D +1 D b15..........b0

b15..........b0

b31..........b16b15..............b0

X = b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)

Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.

Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.

When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result, occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.

Program Example:

The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.

X0

MUL D0 D10 D20

MUL D0 D10


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

K8M0




API

23

Mnemonic

Operands

Function

DIV P S

1

, S

2

, D Division

Type

OP



S

1

S

2

D

* *

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Operands:

S

1

: Dividend S

2

: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder

Explanations:

1. In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.

2. This instruction divides S

1

and S

2

in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S

1

, S

2

and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.

16-bit instruction:

Quotient

Remainder

+1

/ =

Program Example:

When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in

D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.

X0

DIV D0 D10 D20

DIV D0 D10 K4Y0

API Mnemonic

24 INC P

Operands

D

Function

Increment

Type

OP



D * * * * *





Operands:

D: Destination device

Explanations:

1. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will plus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed.

2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).

3. In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit operation,

2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.

Program Example:

When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.

X0

INCP D0

API

25

Mnemonic

DEC P

Operands

D

Function

Decrement

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C DEC, DECP: 3 steps

D * * * * *

Operands:

D: Destination

Explanations:

1. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed.

2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).

3. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation, -

2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.

Program Example:

When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.

X0

DECP D0


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




API Mnemonic

Operands

30 ROR P D, n

Function

Rotate to the Right

Type

OP

Bit Devices

n

Word devices

*

* *

* * * *

Program Steps


D

Operands:

D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation

Explanations:

1. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits.

When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.

2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).

Program Example:

X0

RORP D10 K4

Rotate to the right

D10

upper bit

0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 lower bit

0 1

Carry flag

D10

upper bit

0 1 0 1 0 1 1

16 bits

After one rotation to the right

1 1 0 1 1 0 1

* lower bit

0 0 0

Carry flag

API

31

Mnemonic

ROL P

Operands

D, n

Function

Rotate to the Left

Type

OP



D * * * * * n

* *





Operands:

D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation

Explanations:

1. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits.

2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).

Program Example:

When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.

X0

D10 K4 upper bit

1 1 1 1

Rotate to the left

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 lower bit

0 0 0

D10

Carry flag upper bit

1 1 1 1 0 0 0

16 bits

After one rotation to the left lower bit

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

D10

Carry flag

1

D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive

API

53

Mnemonic

DHSCS

Operands

S1, S2, D

Function

Compare (for high-speed counter)

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C DHSCS: 13 steps

S1

S2

* * *

*

* * *

Operands:

S1: Comparison Value S2: High-speed counter C235 D: Comparison result

Explanations:

1. It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse.

2. To count automatically, please set the target value by using DHSCS command and set

M1028=On. The counter C235 will be ON when the count number = target value. If you want to clear C235, please set M1029=ON.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




3. Please use rising-edge/falling-edge command, such as LDP/LDF, for the contact condition. Please notice that error may occur when using contact A/B for the contact condition.

4. There are three input modes for high-speed counter in the following can be set by D1044.

A-B phase mode(4 times frequency )(D1044=0): user can input the A and B pulse for counting. Make sure that

A

,

B

and GND are grounding.

Pulse + signal mode(D1044=1): user can count by pulse input or signal. A is for pulse and

B is for signal. Make sure that

A

,

B

and GND are grounding.

Pulse + flag mode(D1044=2): user can count by M1030. Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that

A

, and GND are grounding.

Program Example:

1. Assume that when M100=ON, it is set to A-B phase mode. When M101=ON, it is set to pulse+signal mode. When M102=ON, it is set to pulse+flag mode.

2. M1030 is used to set to count up (OFF) and count down (ON).

3. If M0 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of highspeed counter. When C235 goes from H’2 to H’3 or from H’4 to H’3, M3 will be always be

ON.

4. If M1 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of highspeed counter. When C235 goes from H’1004F to H’10050 or from H’10051 to H’10050,

M2 will be always be ON.

5. M1028: it is used to enable(ON)/disable(OFF) the high-speed counter function. M1029: it is used to clear the high-speed counter. M1018: it is used to start high-speed counter function. (when M1028 is ON).

6. D1025: the low word of high-speed counter C235. D1026: the high word of high-speed counter C235.



M2

M3

M10

M11

M100

M101

M102

M102

M0 M1018

M1 M1018

CALL NOW 800-985-6929

MOV http://www.automatedpt.com


K0 D1044

MOV K1 D1044

MOV K2 D1044

M1030

DHSCS H10050 C235

DHSCS H3 C235

M2

M3

Y1

M1028

M1029

M1000

MOV D1025

MOV D1026

D0

D1

END

API

139

Mnemonic

RPR P

Operands

S1, S2

Function

Read the AC motor drive’s parameters

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C RPR, RPRP: 5 steps

S1

S2

* * *

*


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Operands:

S1: Data address for reading S2: Register that saves the read data

API Mnemonic

Operands

Function

140 WPR P S1, S2 Write the AC motor drive’s parameters

Type

OP



S1

* *

S2

* *

*

*

Operands:

S1: Data address for writing S2: Register that saves the written data

Program Example:

1. Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD-E into D0 and H2101 into

D1.

2. When M0=ON, it will write the data in D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD-E.

3. When M1=ON, it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. start the

AC motor drive.

4. When M2=ON, it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. stop the

AC motor drive.

5. When data is written successfully, M1017 will be ON.

M1000

RPR

H2100 D0

RPR H2101 D1

M0

M1

WPR

WPRP

D10

H2

H2001

H2000

M2

M1017

WPRP

Y0

H1

H2000

END




API

141

Mnemonic

FPID P


Operands Function

S1, S2, S3, S4 PID control for the AC motor drive

Type

OP


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C FPID, FPIDP: 9 steps

S1

* *

S2

* *

*

*

S3

S4

* *

* *

*

*

Operands:

S1: PID Set Point Selection(0-4), S2: Proportional gain P (0-100), S3: Integral Time I (0-10000), S4:

Derivative control D (0-100)

Explanation:

1. This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly, including Pr.10.00 PID set point selection, Pr.10.02 Proportional gain (P), Pr.10.03

Integral time (I) and Pr.10.04 Derivative control (D)

Program Example:

1. Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3=1 (unit:

0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).

2. Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit: 0.01),

S3=0 and S4=0.

3. Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital keypad), S2=1

(unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


M0

FPID

M1

FPID

M2

FPID

M1000

H0

H0

H1

MOV

D1027

H0

H1

H1

D1


H1

H0

H0

H1

H0

H0

END

API

142

Mnemonic

FREQ P

Operands Function

S1, S2, S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive

Type

OP



S1

* *

S2

* *

S3

* *

*

*

*

Operands:

S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time

Explanation:

1. This command can control frequency command, acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Please use M1025 to RUN(ON)/STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction: FWD(ON)/REV(OFF).

Program Example:

1. M1025: RUN(ON)/STOP(Off) the AC motor drive. M1026: operation direction of the AC motor drive – FWD(OFF)/REV(ON). M1015: frequency is reached.

2. When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.

3. When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.



M1000

M11

M10 M11

M11 M10



M1025

M1026

FREQP K300

FREQ K3000

END

K0

K50

K0

K60


CALL NOW 800-985-6929



D.6 Error Code


Code

PLod

ID Description

20 Data write error


Check if the program is error and download the program again

PLSv 21 Data write error when executing

Power on again and download the program again

PLdA 22 Program upload error

1. Please upload again.

2. Return to the factory if it occurs continuously

Check if the program is error and download program again

Power on again and download program again

PLFF 31 Command error when executing

PLSn 32 Check sum error




Appendix E CANopen Function

The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data

(Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details. The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation

Delta CANopen supports functions:

Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;

Delta CANopen supports services:

PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2

SDO (Service Data Object):

Initiate SDO Download;

Initiate SDO Upload;

Abort SDO;

SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.

SOP (Special Object Protocol):

Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;

Support SYNC service;

Support Emergency service.

NMT (Network Management):

Support NMT module control;

Support NMT Error control;

Support Boot-up.

Delta CANopen doesn’t support service:

Time Stamp service


CALL NOW 800-985-6929

E-1 http://www.automatedpt.com


Appendix E CANopen Function |

E.1 Overview

E.1.1 CANopen Protocol

CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA

302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).

Device Profile CiA

DSP-401

Device Profile CiA

DSP-404

Device Profile CiA

DSP-XXX

OSI Layer 7

Application

Communication Profile CiA DS-301

OSI Layer 2

Data Link Layer

CAN Controller

CAN 2.0A

OSI Layer 1

Physical Layer

+ -

+ -

ISO 11898

CAN bus

E-2 Revision Oct. 2009, 07EE, SW--PW V1.14/CTL V2.14




E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition

8~1

plug

PIN Signal

1

2

3

CAN_H

CAN_L

CAN_GND

Description

CAN_H bus line (dominant high)

CAN_L bus line (dominant low)

Ground / 0V /V-

7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-

E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set

To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows:

COB Identifier (CAN Identifier)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Function Code Node Number

Object Function Code Node Number COB-ID Object Dictionary

Index

Broadcast messages

0x1005,

0x1007

TIME STAMP

Point-to-point messages

0010 - 0x100 0x1012, 0x1013


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Object Function Code Node Number COB-ID http://www.automatedpt.com

Object Dictionary

Index

Default SDO (tx)

Default SDO (rx)

NMT Error

Control

1011

1100

1-127

1-127

E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol

It has services as follows:

NMT (Network Management Object)

SDO (Service Data Object)

0x581-0x5FF 0x1200

0x601-0x67F 0x1200

EMCY (Emergency Object)

E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object)

The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All

CANopen nodes have a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram of a node are shown as follows:





(1)

Initializing

(15)

Reset Application (9)

(11)

(10)

(16)

Reset Communication

(14)

(2)F

Pre-Operation ABCD

(3) (4)

(5)

(13)

(7)

Stopped AB

(8)

(12)

Operation ABCD

(6)

(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state A: NMT

(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically

(3) (6) Start remote node

B: Node Guard

C: SDO

(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state

(5) (8) Stop remote node

(9) (10) (11) Reset node

(12) (13) (14) Reset communication

(15) Enter reset application state automatically

D: Emergency

E: PDO

F: Boot-up

(16) Enter reset communication state automatically


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped

PDO

SDO

○

SYNC

○

Time Stamp

EMERG

○

○

Boot-up

○

NMT

○

○

○

○

○

○

○ ○

NMT Protocol is shown as follows:

NMT Master

Request request

Start Remote Node byte 0 byte 1

CS Node-ID

COB-ID=0

NMT Slave(s)

Indication(s)

Indication

Indication

Indication

Cs

Value Definition

1 Start

2 Stop

Pre-Operational

Node

E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object)

SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model.

One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between two nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.

The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The access path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has sub-index if necessary.

The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows:




Type

Initiate Domain

Upload

0

1


Data

2

Data

3

Data

4

Data

5

Data

6

Data

7

6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Index Index Data Data Data Data

command LH HL HH

Initiate Domain

Download

Client

Server

0 1 -

0

N E S

- - - -

Client

Server

1 0 -

1 0 -

- - - -

N E S

Abort Domain

Transfer

Client 0 0 - - - -

Server 0 0 - - - -

N: Bytes not use

E: normal(0)/expedited(1)

S: size indicated

E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object)

PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices.

Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a nonconfirmed mode.

PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the following table:

Type Number

PDO

Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only

○

1-240

○ ○

241-251 Reserved

252 ○

○

253

○

254

○

255

○

○

Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.

Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving

SYNC.

Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.

Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.

All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.

Example:

Master transmits PDO data to Slave

PDO1

CAN(H)

CAN(L)

Master Slave

PDO1 data value Data 0,

Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,

0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88,

Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size

PDO1 Map

0x1600

0x1600

0x1600

0x1600

0x1600

2

3

4

0

1

0. Number

1. Mapped Object

2. Mapped Object

3. Mapped Object

4. Mapped Object

1

0x60400010

0

0

0

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

0x60400010

0x6040 0 0. Control word 0x2211 R/W

U16

(2 Bytes)

Slave returns message to Master

PDO1

CAN(H)

CAN(L)

Master Slave

U8

U32

U32

U32

U32

PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,

0xF3, 0x00,

Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size

PDO1 Map

0x1A00

0x1A00

0x1A00

0x1A00

0x1A00

2

3

4

0

1

0. Number

1. Mapped Object

2. Mapped Object

3. Mapped Object

4. Mapped Object

0x6041 0 Status Word

1

0x60410010

0

0

0

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

U8

U32

U32

U32

U32

0xF3

R/W U16




E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object)


Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following:

Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Content Emergency

Code

Error register

(Object 1001H)

Manufacturer specific Error Field

Definition of Emergency Object

Display

Controller

Error

Code

Description

0001H

Over current

0002H

Over voltage

0003H

Overheating

0005H

Overload

0006H

Overload 1

0007H

Overload 2

0008H

External Fault

0009H Over-current during acceleration

000AH Over-current during deceleration

CANopen

Error

Code

7400H

7400H

CANopen

Error

Register

(bit 0~7)

1

2

4310H

2310H

7120H

2310H

9000H

2310H

2310H

2310H

7

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

000DH Lower than standard voltage

000EH Phase

000FH External Base Block

0011H Software protection failure

0013H Internal EEPROM can not be programmed

0014H Internal EEPROM can not be read

0015H CC (current clamp)

0016H OV hardware error

0017H GFF hardware error

0018H OC hardware error

001AH V-phase

001BH W-phase

001CH OV or LV

001DH Temperature sensor error

001FH Internal EEPROM can not be programmed

2240H

3220h

3130h

9000h

6320h

5530h

5530h

5000h

5000h

5000h

5000h

2300h

2300h

2300h

3210h

4310h

5530h

1

1

1

1

2

3

7

7

2

2

7

1

2

7

7

7

7


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Display

Controller

Error

Code

0020H

0023H

Description

Internal EEPROM can not be read

Motor overheat protection

0029H Communication time-out error on the control board or power board

CANopen

Error

Code

5530h

FF00h

7120h

7300h

CANopen

Error

Register

(bit 0~7)

7

7

3

7

7500h 4

Definition of Index

Index Sub Definition

option code register

Factory

Setting

R/W Size Unit

0x00010192

RO U32

0 RO U8

0x80

RW U32

RW U32 us

NOTE

500us~15000us

RO U32

0x100C 0 Guarding time

0x1015 0 Inhibit time EMCY

0x1016

0x1018

0x1200

0 Number

1

Consumer heartbeat time

0 Number

3 Revision

0

1

Server SDO

Parameter

COB-ID Client ->

Server

0

RO U32

RO U32

0 RW U16 ms 0x80 + node 1

0 RW U8

0x0000080

+Node-ID

RO U32

0

RW U16 100us

0x1 RO U8

It is set to be multiple of 10.

0x0 RW U32 1ms

0x0 RW U16 1ms

Heartbeat time can be used when

Guarding time is invalid.

Heartbeat time can be used when

Guarding time is invalid.

0x3 RO U8

0x000001DD RO U32

0x00002600

+model

0x0000600+

Node-ID

RO U32

0x00010000 RO U32

2

RO U8

RO U32




Index Sub Definition

2

COB-ID Client <-

Server

0 Number

1 COB-ID used by PDO

0x1400

0x1401

0x1600

0x1601

0x1800

0x1801

0 Number


0 Number

4 4.Mapped

0 Number

Object

4 4.Mapped

0 Number

Object


4 Reserved timer

0 Number



Factory

Setting

R/W Size Unit NOTE

0x0000580+

Node-ID

RO U32

2 RO U8

0x00000200

+Node-ID

RW U32

5 RW U8

2 RO U8

0x80000300

+Node-ID

RW U32

00:Acyclic &

Synchronous

01~240:Cyclic &

Synchronous

255: Asynchronous

5 RW U8

00:Acyclic &

Synchronous

01~240:Cyclic &

Synchronous

255: Asynchronous

2 RW U8

0x60400010 RW U32

0x60420020 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U8

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

5 RO U8

0x00000180

+Node-ID

RW U32

5 RW U8

00:Acyclic &

Synchrouous

01~240:Cyclic &

Synchrouous

253: Remote function

255: Asynchronous

0

RW U16 100us


3 RW U8 Reserved

0 RW U16 1ms

5 RO U8

0x80000280

+Node-ID

RW U32

5 RW U8

00:Acyclic &

Synchrouous

01~240:Cyclic &

Synchrouous

253: Remote function

255: Asynchronous


CALL NOW 800-985-6929




Index Sub

0x1A00

0x1A01

Definition

4 Reserved timer

0 Number

0 Number

Object

Object

Factory

Setting

R/W Size Unit NOTE

0

RW U16 100us


3 RW U8

0 RW U16 1ms

2 RW U8

0x60410010 RW U32

0x60430010 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U8

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

0 RW U32

Index Sub

0x6042

Definition

0 vl target velocity

Factory

Setting

RW Size Unit Map NOTE

2 RW S16 Yes

0: No action

2: Disable Voltage

3: Quick stop

0 RO U16 Yes

0 RW U16 Yes bit 0 ~ 3: switch status bit 4: rfg enable bit 5: rfg unlock bit 6: rfg use ref bit 7: Fault reset

Bit0 Ready to switch on

Bit1 Switched on

Bit2 Operation enabled

Bit3 Fault

Bit4 Voltage enabled

0 RO U16 Yes

Bit5 Quick stop

Bit6 Switch on disabled

Bit7 Warning

Bit8

Bit9 Remote

Bit10 Target reached

Bit11 Internal limit active

Bit12 - 13

Bit14 - 15

0 RW S16 rpm Yes

E-12

0x6050

0x6051

10000 RW U32 1ms Yes

If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the unit must be 100ms and can’t be set to 0.

0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes


0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes





Index Sub Definition


Factory

Setting

RW Size Unit Map NOTE

0 : disable drive function

1 :slow down on slow down ramp

2: slow down on quick stop ramp (2th decel. time)

5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK

STOP

6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK

STOP

2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode

2 RO U8 Yes

E.2 How to Control by CANopen

To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set parameters by the following steps:

Step 1. Operation source setting: set Pr.02.01 to 5 (CANopen communication. Keypad

STOP/RESET disabled.)

Step 2. Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 5 (CANopen communication)

Step 3. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09.13 (CANopen Communication Address 1-127)

Step 4. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.14 (CANBUS Baud Rate)

Step 5. Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary: Set Pr.04.05 to 04.08 or Pr.11.06 to

11.11 to 23.

According to DSP-402 motion control rule, CANopen provides speed control mode. There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop. To get current status, please read “Status Word”.

Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals.

Control word is a 16-byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition. The status bits are bit

4 to bit 6 as shown in the following:

Bit 4: ramp function enabled

Bit 5: ramp function disabled

Bit 6: rfg use reference


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


CALL NOW 800-985-6929


Following is the flow chart for status switch:

Power

Disable

Start http://www.automatedpt.com

Fault

Fault Reaction Active

X0XX1111

0XXXXX0X

0XXX1111

Not Ready to Switch On

X0XX0000

Fault

X0XX1000

XXXXXXXX

Switch On Disable

X1XX0000

0XXXX110

QStop=1

0XXXXX0X or

0XXXX01X

QStop=0

Ready to Switch On

X01X0001

0XXXX111

0XXXX110

0XXXX01X or

0XXXXX0X

QStop=0

Switch On

X01X0011

0XXX1111

Operation Enable

0XXX0110

0XXXX01X

QStop=0

X01X0111

0XXX1111

QStop=1

0XXXXX0X or

Font=0

Quick Stop Active

X00X0111

Power

Enable

